Dell Compellent Storage Center Configuration Guide

Storage Center
System Manager
Version 6.3
Administrators Guide
Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrators Guide

Document Number: 680-019-013
Revision Date
A
January 2013
Description
Initial release in support of version 6.3.
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

Note: Indicates important information that helps you complete a procedure.
Caution: Indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid
the problem.
Warning: Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in property damage, personal injury,
or death.
Copyright Notice and Trademarks

2013 Dell Inc.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the Dell logo, and Compellent are trademarks of Dell Inc.
Contacting Dell Technical Support Services

For technical support, go to support.dell.com/compellent/.
Contents
1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Requirements for System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Starting Storage Center System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Respond to Startup Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
View the System Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Navigating the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Storage Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
System Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Search Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Next Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Set Controller and System IP Address for IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Manage Unmanaged Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Change the Admin Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Create Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Configure User Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Create Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Apply Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Review Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Create Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Monitor Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Monitor Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2 Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Volume Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable Volume Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Mapping Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View General Properties for all Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Properties for Specific Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Multiple Volumes for a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map a Volume to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map Multiple Volumes to a Server or Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map a Volume to Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dell Compellent
13
14
14
15
16
17
17
17
17
21
22
24
25
26
iii
Contents
Remove Mappings from a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Advanced Mapping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select a Logical Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrict Mapping Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Multipathing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Read-Only Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Mapping to Down Server Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable Import Data to Lowest Tier Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disable Import to Lowest Tier Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Boot from SAN Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Volume Space Consumption Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allow Replays to Coalesce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset VMS Unique Disk ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Volume Cache Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Notes to a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restore a Deleted Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Empty the Recycle Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expand a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Volume Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Notes to a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move Volumes to a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply Replay Profiles to Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Copy, Mirror, and Migrate Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirror a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Migrate a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Volume in the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Volume Folder in the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map a Volume to a Server in the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create an External Device with the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Interface Reference for Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volumes or Volume Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replication Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Replay Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Statistics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Charts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daily Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply a Replay Profile to a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
26
27
27
28
30
30
30
31
31
33
34
36
36
36
37
37
37
38
38
39
39
39
40
40
40
41
41
41
41
42
42
43
44
45
45
47
47
47
47
48
48
50
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
60
60
61
Contents
Creating Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Create a Non-Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule a One-time Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule a Daily Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule a Weekly Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule a Monthly Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Volumes Attached to a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Replays Attached to a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Individual Replay Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Profile Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Profiles Attached to a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove a Rule from a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change a Non-Consistent Replay Profile to a Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change a Consistent Replay Profile to a Non-Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detach Volumes from a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Replays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Volume Maximums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expire (Delete) a Replay Explicitly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create an Immediate Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create an Immediate Replay from a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pause a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resume a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pause Replays for an Individual Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resume Replays for an Individual Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Up Orphaned Volume Replay Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Volume Replay Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View a Volume Replay Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a View Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Consistency Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Volumes from Consistency Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replay Profile General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replay Profile Volumes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping an External Device to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing from an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Editing a QoS Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New QoS Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit QoS Definition Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Interface Reference for QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QoS General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QoS Limit Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QoS Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QoS Definition Replications Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QoS Definition Properties General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dell Compellent
62
63
65
67
67
67
68
69
69
69
70
70
71
72
72
72
72
72
73
74
74
74
75
75
76
76
76
76
77
77
78
79
79
81
81
83
83
84
85
86
88
90
95
95
96
97
98
98
99
100
101
102
Contents
QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

QoS Definition Properties Notes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5 Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions for Servers Created by FluidFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Server Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Volumes Mapped to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Details about Volumes Mapped to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Volumes Mapped to a Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Server Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Single Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Operating System of a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove Mappings from a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Server Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New Server for a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Server to Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove a Server from Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert a Server to a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promote Server Cluster Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demote Server Cluster Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Virtual Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Virtual Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert a Physical Server to a Virtual Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert a Virtual Server to a Physical Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a Virtual Host Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Server Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Server Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Servers to a Server Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move Servers to a Different Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing HBAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Find an HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add HBAs to a Server from a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Define an HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove HBAs from a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete an HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View a Server Connectivity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Topology Explorer Server Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New Server with the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New Server Folder with the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Interface Reference for Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Information General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server HBAs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Connectivity Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Mapping Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Volumes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Charts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
106
106
106
107
108
108
108
109
109
110
110
113
113
114
114
115
115
118
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
124
125
126
126
127
127
127
127
128
128
129
130
131
131
132
133
134
134
135
135
136
137
138
139
140
Contents
6 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Setting Controller Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Controller Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Controller IP Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Controller Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Controller Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Controller Performance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View the Back of a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Controller Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View FC Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View FC IO Port General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View FC IO Card Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View FC IO Card Hardware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set FC IO Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset IO Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Preferred Physical Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View iSCSI Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View iSCSI Control Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Advanced iSCSI Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View iSCSI IO Card Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View iSCSI Hardware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View iSCSI Performance Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change an iSCSI Control Port Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change iSCSI Control Port IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the iSCSI Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset IO Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the iSCSI Card Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Digest Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Timeout Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About VLAN Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable VLAN Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing SAS Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View SAS IO Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View SAS IO Card Connectivity Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View SAS Port Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View SAS Port Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View SAS IO Card Performance Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Remote Storage Center to iSCSI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Remote iSCSI Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Advanced Remote Connection Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete iSCSI Remote Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Remote CHAP Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Remote CHAP Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dell Compellent
142
142
142
142
143
144
145
145
146
147
147
149
150
151
153
153
154
155
155
157
158
159
159
160
161
161
161
162
162
162
163
163
163
164
164
164
165
166
166
167
168
169
169
170
170
172
173
173
174
174
174
174
vii
Contents
Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Legacy Port Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Disable CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change CHAP Authentication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Remote CHAP Initiators from a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing IO Card Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plan a Hardware Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure IO Card Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign a New Link Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Usage Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rebalancing Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Interface Reference for Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller CPU PerformanceTab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Back Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller General Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller IP Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Info Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
180
180
180
181
181
182
182
183
184
185
186
186
188
188
189
190
191
7 Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Disk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Tiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Tier Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Unassigned Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release a Managed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revert a Released Disk to Managed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Disk Placement in an Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alert for Disk with Single Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rebalancing RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Rebalance Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAID Rebalance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View a RAID Rebalance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule a RAID Rebalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a RAID Rebalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Disk Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Disk Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename a Disk Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a Disk Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove a Storage Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Storage Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Profiles Provided in System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Profiles for SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identify a Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allow Storage Profile Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
194
194
194
195
195
196
198
200
201
202
202
202
203
204
205
205
206
206
207
207
208
208
209
209
209
210
212
212
213
214
214
214
215
Contents
Apply a Storage Profile to a Single Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

View Volumes Configured with a Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify a Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a User-Created Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Manual Storage Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable Manual Storage Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Storage Profile in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View a Storage Profile Created in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change RAID Stripe Width in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Interface Reference for Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Disk Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Enclosure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosure Hardware Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
215
216
216
216
217
217
218
218
218
219
219
220
220
222
223
8 System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Modifying System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename the Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the System Management IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select RAID Stripe Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Data Progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule Data Progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determine if Data Progression is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop Data Progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set System Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Global Disk Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Login Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Optional Information about Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Date and Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure iSNS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Syslog Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allow Replications to/from Remote Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Submit a License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding Unmanaged Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Unassigned Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Phone Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Home Immediately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View the Phone Home Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure a Phone Home Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Current Local Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Fault Domains (FC and iSCSI only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit a Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Default Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert to Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure iSCSI IO Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dell Compellent
226
226
227
228
229
229
230
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
240
242
242
243
243
244
244
245
245
247
248
250
251
252
253
254
255
ix
Contents
Add iSCSI Remote Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Managing System Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create IP Filter for Current User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create an IP Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify an IP Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete an IP Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Access Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure the SNMP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure a Secure Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disable Secure Console Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Secure Console Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generate a New SSL Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset the License Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating Storage Center Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check for an Update Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Download an Available Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Automatic Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Update Package Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decide How to Apply Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restarting Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shutting Down Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prepare to Shut Down Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shut Down Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shut Down Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn on Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn on Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Online Storage Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Available Storage Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Storage Consumption Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Data Progression Pressure Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Volume Distribution Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Background Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to the Alert Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alert Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alert Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alert Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View the System Alert Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acknowledged Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alert Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding More Information About an Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Space Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Storage Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Storage Alert Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Interface Reference for System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Properties General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Properties Storage Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Properties Data Progression Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Properties Cache Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Properties Disk Sparing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
257
258
259
261
261
262
262
263
263
263
263
265
266
266
268
270
270
271
272
273
274
274
275
275
276
276
276
276
277
277
279
280
282
283
283
284
284
284
284
285
285
285
286
286
287
288
289
290
290
291
292
293
294
Contents
System Properties Message Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

System Properties Info Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
9 Users and User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Understanding Users, User Groups, and Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Privilege Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Account Management and Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Requirements for External Directory Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing an Account Management Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling Directory Services Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Local User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grant Access to a Directory User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grant Access to a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Directory User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify User Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Local User Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downgrade User Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade User Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify User Privileges for a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disable a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove Access for a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restore a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring User Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Whether Users Can Change Their Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Disk and Cache Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Default Volume Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Default Volume Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Storage Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Replay Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Mapping Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Default Server Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename a User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove a folder from a User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Folder to a User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a User Group to a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove a User Group From a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add or Remove a Mapping from a Local User Group to a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . .
User Interface Reference for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information About All Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information About an Individual User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
298
298
298
298
299
299
300
306
306
307
308
310
311
314
314
314
314
315
315
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
326
327
328
328
329
329
329
330
331
331
332
A Server HBA Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Queue Depth Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings by HBA Vendor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cisco Fibre Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emulex Fibre Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dell Compellent
335
335
336
336
xi
Contents
LSI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qlogic Fibre Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qlogic iSCSI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings by Server Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Citrix XenServer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-UX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM AIX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microsoft Windows Server 2000/2003/2008/2012 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Novell Netware Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oracle Solaris Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Red Hat Linux RHEL Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SuSE Linux SLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VMWare Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
338
339
340
341
341
341
341
342
342
342
343
343
343
B iSCSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Flow Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Ports and Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bi-directional Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumbo Frames and Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other iSCSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
345
345
345
345
346
347
C UPS User FAQ and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

UPS User FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring an APC UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify or Delete a Trap Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring a Liebert UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinitialize the UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
350
352
356
356
359
D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
E Port Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
xii
Getting Started
This section provides an overview of Storage Center System Manager and identifies the
steps to get started.
Contents
Starting Storage Center System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Navigating the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Next Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Overview
Storage Center System Manager provides a central management interface to create and
manage Storage Center volumes, servers, disks, and users.
Use System Manager to:
Provision volumes and map them to servers.
Display the status of hardware components.
Manage local backup and restore.
Phone Home information to Dell Technical Support Services.
Set up users and access privileges.
In addition to the System Manager, Storage Center provides a rich set of separately
licensed applications that support dynamic storage. To view currently licensed applications,
select Licensed Features from the Help menu.
Note: Figures in this document show views, menus, and options displayed when
logged in with Admin privileges. Users logged in as Volume Manager or Reporter
will see only the options that their privileges allow.
Dell Compellent
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Requirements for System Manager

Storage Center System Manager is a Java applet that requires the use of a Java plugin to
run. The minimum software requirements for running System Manager are given below.
Component
Requirements
Web browser
Windows Internet Explorer versions 7, 8, and 9
Windows Internet Explorer Desktop version 10 (Internet Explorer

Modern version 10 is not supported)
Mozilla Firefox on Microsoft Windows
Note: Other web browsers may work but are not officially supported.
Java
Java version 6 or later
When using Java 7, open the Java Control Panel and make sure that the
option Enable Java content in the browser is selected
Note: Storage Center System Manager cannot load with the following unique
combination of applications: Windows 2008 (64-bit), Mozilla Firefox 3.0, and Java 6.
Starting Storage Center System Manager

Access Storage Center System Manager from a workstation or computer on the same
network as the Storage Center controller. Log on to System Manager
Follow these steps to log on to System Manager.
1 In the address bar of the Web browser, enter the name or IP address of the
management controller. If you are using IPv6 addressing, for initial login use the IPv4
address of the management controller. After logging in, you must set the IPv6 address
and IPv6 Prefix in the controller properties.
2 Click Yes or Continue to acknowledge the messages and alerts. The Storage Center
System Manager logon dialog box appears.
Starting Storage Center System Manager
3 In the User field, enter the default administrator user name:

Admin
4 Enter the administrative password for Storage Center. If a new password has not been
set, enter the default password:
mmm
5 Click Login. If an additional security alert(s) appear, click Yes and Run to continue.
Note: The End User License Agreement is displayed the first time a new user
logs on to Storage Center. Click Accept to continue.
See Also
Set Controller IP Properties on page 142
Respond to Startup Messages

Messages about ports or hardware may appear upon system startup that require action.
Unbalanced Local Ports

If a controller has been added or taken offline, ports can become unbalanced. If local ports
are unbalanced, you are prompted to balance the ports.
Balance unbalanced ports: In the message dialog box, click Yes to rebalance local
ports.
Turn off the rebalance ports message:

a Select the Controllers node icon in the System Tree by right clicking on it.
b From the shortcut menu, select Rebalance Local Ports.
c Uncheck the option to check for unbalanced local ports at startup.
IO Card Change Detected

If an IO card change is detected on system startup, Storage Center automatically launches
the IO Card Change wizard.
See Also
Managing IO Card Changes on page 181
Unmanaged Hardware
If the System Manager finds unmanaged hardware, such as disks or server host bus
adaptors (HBAs), it prompts you to manage them.
See Also
Managing Disks on page 195
Dell Compellent
View the System Dashboard

The center pane of the System Explorer opens to the system dashboard with Storage
Summary and Storage History displayed.
If a Storage Center system has more than one disk folder, the System Manager displays a
Storage Summary and Storage History for each disk folder.
The upper pane shows the Storage Summary in a graph and in list form.
Field
Description
Blue banner
Date and time when the summary was generated.
Status
Current status of storage utilization. When the Free disk space

available falls below the Low Space Threshold (10%), the Status value
changes to Space Low.
Total disk space
Amount of raw disk space available (gold in the bar graph).
Used disk space
Space used by volumes and replays (blue in the bar graph).
Free disk space
Space available for volumes and replays (gray in the bar graph).
Unhealthy/Bad Space
Space (if any) found on any unhealthy disks, or any bad space found
on disks that are healthy. This appears only if unhealthy or bad disk
space has been found (black in the bar graph).
More Details
Link to Online Storage view, which contains charts that detail storage
use and trends.
The lower pane shows Storage History in a chart that tracks disk use over time.
The Blue banner shows when the history was generated.
The Blue line shows the amount of space used recently.
The Red line shows the amount of raw disk space available.
The Yellow line shows the Low Space Threshold.
Navigating the Interface

This section describes the main elements of the System Manager user interface.
Storage Management Menu

The Storage Management menu is located in the upper-left corner of the main pane.
Click the Storage Management menu to see the menus and options for viewing and
configuring Storage Center.
Dell Compellent
View Menu
The View menu provides multiple ways to configure a system or view system properties.
Options are specific to each individual view. After a specific view is displayed, the tab for
that view appears in the upper pane of the System Explorer window for the remainder of
the current session.
Click View to open the View menu.
If more tabs are available than can be displayed, the window displays scroll arrows to the
far right of the view tabs. Click the arrows to scroll through the open tabs.
Context Menu
Context menu commands that apply to commands currently being used appear near the
top of the System Explorer window.
If there is not sufficient room to display all context menu commands at the top of the
window, a down arrow is displayed. Click the arrow to display all commands shown in the
shortcut menu.
See Also
Shortcut Menu on page 7
System Tree
Expand component folders in the System Tree to view individual components. The System
Tree displays the system components of a Storage Center.
Shortcut Menu
The shortcut menu provides easy access to specific options for the selected item. Rightclick an item in the System Tree to view the shortcut menu for that item.
Shortcut menu
Context menu commands
Down arrow
Search Function
The Search box in the lower left provides the ability to search through the System Tree for
objects with matching names. A drop-down menu allows filtering objects by type. A check
box is provided to match case (default). Arrows allow you to navigate forward and
backward. The arrow to the left of the search field allows you to minimize/maximize the
search panel.
Dell Compellent
Next Steps
This section identifies basic tasks that you may need to perform after your first log on to
Storage Center System Manager. These tasks are configuration dependent and not all
tasks are required at all sites.
Set Controller and System IP Address for IPv6

If you are using IPv6 addressing, you must set the Management IP address in the
Controller Properties and in the System Properties. Make sure that you set the controller
IP addresses first.
See Also
Set the System Management IP Address on page 227
Manage Unmanaged Disks

It is usually assumed that disks attached to the Storage Center controller were identified
and assigned during installation. If not, Storage Center recognizes unmanaged hardware
and asks that you manage (assign) it. Storage Center groups disks into a disk folder to
create a pool of storage from which volumes are created.
See Also
Manage Unassigned Disks on page 198
Change the Admin Password

The default administrator password is mmm. It is recommended that you change the
default before Storage Center is put into production.
See Also
Change Local User Passwords on page 314
Create Servers
Creating a server means to identify it to a Storage Center using the Create Server wizard.
You can also communicate with the server using iSCSI CHAP by adding remote CHAP
initiators.
See Also
Managing Single Servers on page 110
Managing Server Clusters on page 115
Managing Virtual Servers on page 124
Add a Remote CHAP Initiator on page 174
Configure User Volume Defaults

Access to Storage Center is based on volumes and volume settings.
See Also
Set Disk and Cache Volume Defaults on page 319
Set Mapping Volume Defaults on page 324
Next Steps
Create Volumes
Depending on the configuration at your site, you may need to create volumes to organize
data and users.
See Also
Create a Volume on page 17
Create Multiple Volumes for a Server on page 22
Apply Replay Profiles

A Replay Profile is a collection of rules describing when to take periodic Replays for one or
more volumes and the time at which Replays are deleted (expired). Replays create spaceefficient point-in-time copies (PITC) to provide immediate recovery from data loss. System
Manager provides standard replay profiles, and you also can create replay profiles that fit
specific needs. In either case, you must apply a replay profile to each volume before it is
included in any replay activity.
See Also
Replay Profiles on page 59
Review Storage Profiles

Storage Profiles determine how to move data most effectively within Storage Center. By
default, a storage profile is applied to each volume.
When licensed, Storage Center uses Data Progression to write and move data so that the
most active blocks of data remain on high-performance solid state drives (SSDs) or Fibre
Channel drives, while less active blocks automatically move to lower-cost, high-capacity
SAS drives. This is the most effective storage profile for typical Storage Center use.
If you are using Solid State Drives (SSDs) or are working with Dell Technical Support
Services to manage data movement, you may need to create or apply a different storage
profile.
See Also
About Storage Profiles on page 212
Create Users
Users have access to folders, volumes, views, and commands depending on their privilege
level and the User Groups to which they belong. User accounts can be created locally and/
or exist externally in a directory service.
See Also
Users and User Groups on page 297
Enabling Directory Services Authentication on page 300
Managing Users on page 306
Managing User Groups on page 326
Dell Compellent
Monitor Alerts
Alerts warn you of component failure when Storage Center requires attention. The status
of Storage Center is indicated by the color of the System Status icon in the top-right corner
of the main pane. System Manager also displays alert information in a separate tab in the
main window.
See Also
Alert Indicators on page 284
Alert Categories on page 284
Alert Status on page 284
View the System Alert Monitor on page 285
Monitor Disk Drive Consumption

Disk drives that are managed by Storage Center are contained in a disk folder, which is
simply a logical grouping of physical drives. Disk folders can contain a mixture of drive
types, capacities, and speeds. The total capacity of the disk folder is the sum of the
capacities of the drives within the folder.
See Also
Viewing Online Storage Summary on page 277
Monitoring Storage Space on page 287
Add Space as Required

Storage Center allocates disk space from a disk folder for volume and Replay use as
needed based upon the configurations and IO patterns of each volume. As Storage Center
approaches the end of the disk space available within the disk folder, it generates an alert,
warning you to add additional space.
See Also
Space Warnings on page 286
Conservation Mode on page 286
Emergency Mode on page 286
Adding Space on page 289
10
Next Steps
Monitor Volumes
When you select a volume the System Tree, System Manager opens an informational view
specific to the volume, with tabs that allow you to view performance and disk space usage
information for the volume.
View Volume Statistics

Volume statistics show information about disk space usage for the selected volume.
Note: Volume statistics are not available when Data Progression is running.
See Also
Volume Statistics Tab on page 56
View Volume Charts

Volume charts show read and write performance in real time.
See Also
Volume Charts Tab on page 57
View Volume Distribution Reports

Volume Distribution Reports show how volumes are consuming storage space. Information
includes the logical space of each volume that is consumed, and the relationship between
logical space and physical space.
See Also
View Volume Distribution Reports on page 282
Dell Compellent
11
12
Volumes
A volume is a logical unit of storage that servers can access over a network. On Microsoft
operating systems, a volume is assigned a drive letter. On UNIX/Linux systems, a volume
is assigned a mount point.
Contents
Viewing Volume Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Creating and Mapping Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Using Advanced Mapping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Managing Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Managing Volume Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using Copy, Mirror, and Migrate Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
User Interface Reference for Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Dell Compellent
13
Chapter 2 Volumes
Viewing Volume Information

Volumes appear in the System Tree under the Storage node. This section describes the
icons used, and provides general information about the content displayed in System
Manager.
Volume Nodes
When you select a node in the System Tree, System Manager displays information about
the node in a View window.
Node Selected
Information Displayed
Volumes
Lists volumes and volume folders. For each volume not included in
a folder, the window displays the volume status, volume type, logical
size, profile, Storage Profile, Storage type, and Disk folder.
[Volume Folder]
Lists each volume in the folder, and the volume status, volume type,
logical size, Replay profile, Storage Profile, Storage type, and Disk
folder.
[Volume]
Shows information specific to the selected volume organized in

tabbed windows by information type: General, Copy/Mirror/
Migrate, Replays (if licensed), Replay Calendar, Statistics, and
Chart Replication.
The Replication tab shows status about the current replication
activity, and appears for a volume only for the duration of a
replication. Enterprise Manager creates and manages replications.
See Also
User Interface Reference for Volumes on page 48
14
Viewing Volume Information
Volume Icons
System Manager uses icons to indicate volume node, folders, and types.
Icon
Volume Type
Volume node all volumes
Volume folder
Standard volume mapped to a server(s)
Standard volume not mapped to any server
FluidFS volume
Note: Volumes created using the FluidFS file system cannot be
modified or deleted using Storage Center System Manager.
Therefore, for these volumes:
Shortcut menus customarily displayed when right-clicking on a

volume are disabled. Context menu commands customarily
displayed near the top of the System Explorer window are
disabled.
For additional information about FluidFS, see your FluidFS

documentation. For information about adding, removing, and
monitoring FluidFS clusters using Enterprise Manager, refer to
the Enterprise Manager Administrators Guide.
Source volume for a replication to a remote Storage Center.

Note: This icon is also displayed for volumes that have been
configured to Copy, Mirror, or Migrate in the Storage Center System
Manager.
Destination volume for a replication from a remote Storage Center
Primary Live Volume is the volume currently replicating to a

secondary Live Volume.
Secondary Live Volume is the Live Volume to which the primary Live
Volume is replicating.
Note: Replays and Replay Profiles appear if a Storage Center is licensed for Data
Instant Replay. Replication information appears in a tab for the duration of the
Replication.
See Also
Dell Compellent
15
Chapter 2 Volumes
Portable Volume Node

Enterprise Manager creates and manages portable volumes. After Enterprise Manager has
created a portable volume, the portable volume node appears in the Storage Center
System Tree if the Storage Center is licensed for Remote Instant Replay and if any of the
following are true:
A USB disk is connected to the Storage Center.
Data was copied to a portable volume.
A volume was or is waiting to be restored from a portable volume.
See Also
Portable Volume on page 58
16
Creating and Mapping Volumes

User access to volumes is controlled by user groups and associated volume folders and
volumes. Therefore, group volumes into folders based on the way you want to control user
access. You can then create a corresponding user group and grant access to that volume
folder or volume.
View General Properties for all Volumes

The volume properties displayed vary based on your user volume defaults.
1 In the System Tree, expand the Storage node.
2 Select the top-most Volumes icon.
3 In the toolbar, click Volume Properties Multiple Volumes dialog box appears.
4 Click the General tab (if not already selected). The dialog box displays information
about the volumes and the total volume space configured.
View Properties for Specific Volumes

Volume properties provide similar information as the View window, but also provides
controls to enable or disable read and write cache.
1 In the System Tree, expand the Storage node.
2 Select the top-most Volumes icon.
3 In the main window, select a volume or select multiple volumes by holding down the
Shift or Ctrl key and selecting more than one volume.
4 In the toolbar, click Volume Properties.
5 On the Volume Properties dialog box click the General tab (if not already selected).
This dialog box displays information about the selected volume(s).
Create a Volume
If some options shown in the following examples do not appear when creating and
configuring volumes, it is because your user volume default options were configured to
disallow these choices.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select Create Volume.
2 The Create Volume wizard prompts you to select a disk folder for the volume to use.
The disk folder contains the physical disks the volume will use for storage. Select the
disk folder.
3 Click Continue. A page appears asking you to select the redundancy level you would
like to use.
4 Click either Non-Redundant or Redundant.
Note: If the disk folder chosen has not been prepared for the redundancy type
chosen, a page opens with instructions for preparing the disk folder. Follow the
instructions and click Continue when done.
The wizard prompts you for a volume size.
Dell Compellent
17
Chapter 2 Volumes
5 Enter the volume size and select a unit of measure from the drop-down menu. System
Manager passes this size to the server when the volume is mounted.
Note: The Advanced button is displayed only if your User Volume Defaults allow
you to modify the Storage Profile and cache settings to be used by the volume.
6 Click Continue. If Data Instant Replay is licensed for your Storage Center, the Replay
Profile page appears.
7 Select an existing Replay Profile, or click Create a New Replay Profile. For more
information about creating Replay profiles, see Creating Replay Profiles on page 62.
8 Click Continue. The wizard displays a page listing current folders.
18
9 Select an existing folder in which to create the volume or click Create a New Folder to
create a new folder.
10 Enter a volume name or accept the default.
11 (Optional) Add notes.
12 Click Continue. System Manager displays volume attributes.
13 Review the attributes. If correct, click Create Now.

The last page displays a confirmation of the volume creation and presents options
available after creating a volume. Depending on your configuration, some or all of the
following commands may appear on this page.
Dell Compellent
19
Chapter 2 Volumes
14 Perform additional tasks or click Close to exit the wizard.
20
Create Multiple Volumes

Use the Create Volumes wizard to create multiple volumes in a single operation.
1 Right-click on the volume or volume folder node and select Create Volumes. The
Create Volumes wizard starts, displaying a default volume to create.
2 Select whether to copy the attributes of the selected volume or use the default user
attributes when adding a volume.
If Copy the selected volume when adding a volume is selected, select the volume
to copy from the list of volumes and click Add Volume.
The added volume copies all attributes except the name from the volume selected
in the volume list. The number in the name of each volume increments by one:
Volume 1, Volume 2, and so on.
Note: If you want to modify the attributes of a volume before creating it, see
step Step 4 on page 23.
If Use My Volume Defaults when adding a volume is selected, click Add Volume.
The added volumes uses your user volume defaults to create the volume.
3 Click Create Volumes Now. System Manager creates the volumes specified.
See Also
Create Multiple Volumes for a Server on page 22
Dell Compellent
21
Chapter 2 Volumes
Create Multiple Volumes for a Server

Use the Create Volumes wizard to create multiple volumes and map them to a server in a
single operation. If you intend to add multiple volumes with similar attributes, you should
modify the first volume in the list, then copy the attributes from this volume when adding
additional volumes.
Note: Adding a volume to the volume list in the Create Volumes wizard does not
cause the volume to be created. Volumes are only created when you select Create
Volumes Now.
1 In the System Tree, select a server, server cluster, or virtual server.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Volumes. The Create Volumes wizard starts.
By default, the name of the volume is based on the name of the server.
3 Select whether to copy the attributes of the selected volume or use the default user
attributes when adding a volume.
If Copy the selected volume when adding a volume is selected, select the volume
to copy from the list of volumes and click Add Volume.
The added volume copies all attributes except the name from the volume selected
in the volume list. The number in the name of each volume increments by one:
Volume 1, Volume 2, and so on.
Note: If you want to modify the attributes of a volume before copying it, see
step Step 4 on page 23.
If Use My Volume Defaults when adding a volume is selected, click Add Volume.
The added volumes uses your user volume defaults to create the volume.
22
4 (Optional) Follow these steps to modify the attributes of a volume in the Create Volumes
wizard.
a Click Modify Selected Volume. The wizard displays a page that contains the
volume attributes that can be changed.
Note: The volume attributes that you can change depend on your user
volume defaults.
b Modify the attributes as needed.

c Click Apply Changes to save changes and return to the volume list.
5 (Optional) To remove a volume from the Create Volumes wizard, select the volume to
remove and click Remove Selected Volume.
6 Click Create Volumes Now.
If the Map volumes to this server using default settings upon creation check box is
selected, the new volumes will be automatically mapped to the selected server using
default mapping options.
Dell Compellent
23
Chapter 2 Volumes
Map a Volume to a Server

Mapping enables servers to connect to volumes. By mapping the volume to a server you
create the link from the volume to the server. This link is used to access the volume.
1 In the System Tree, select an unmapped (gray) volume. Expand the Storage node if
necessary.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Map Volume to Server. A list of servers is displayed.
3 Select a server to which to map the selected volume.

4 Click Continue.
5 Click Create Now. The volume is mapped.

See Also
Configuring User Volume Defaults on page 317
24
Map Multiple Volumes to a Server or Server Cluster

To create multiple volumes automatically mapped to a server, see Create Multiple Volumes
for a Server on page 22.
1 In the System Tree, select a volume folder or the Volumes node. Volumes in the
selected folder or selected node are listed.
2 Select an unmapped (gray) volume, or use the <Ctrl> key to select more than one
unmapped volume.
3 From the shortcut menu, select Map Volumes to Server. A list of servers appears. By
default, the last server you selected is chosen as the server to which to map the volume.
From here, you can:
Accept the selected server or server cluster.
Choose a different server or server cluster.
Create a server or server cluster to which to map the volumes.
4 Click Continue. System Manager asks you to confirm.

5 (Optional) Click Advanced to modify advanced mapping settings. This page of the
wizard displays advanced options available when mapping selected volumes to the
selected server.
Note: Advanced options available differ depending on server and Storage
Center configurations.
6 Click Map Volumes Now. The volume is mapped to a single server. An exception to this
is if the server is part of a server cluster.
Note: When creating a server cluster, Storage Center attempts to map an
included volume to the same LUN on all cluster servers. If the LUN selected is
not available on a particular server, the mapping is not performed and the volume
is only partially connected to the cluster.
See Also
Using Advanced Mapping Options on page 27
Dell Compellent
25
Chapter 2 Volumes
Map a Volume to Remote System

Mapping a volume to a remote system causes the volume to appear as a remote volume
on the remote system. The volume can then be used as a Replication target.
1 In the System Tree, select an unmapped (gray) volume.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Map Volume to Remote System. A list of remote
systems appears.
3 Select a remote system, then click Continue.
4 (Optional) Click Advanced to restrict mapping paths.
From here you can:
Restrict the path to one transport, such as FC or iSCSI.
In a clustered-controller system, select a controller to which to map the volume.
5 Click Continue.
6 System Manager asks you to confirm. To confirm, click Create Now.
See Also
Volume Icons on page 15
Remove Mappings from a Volume

Follow these steps to remove the mappings from a volume.
1 In the System Tree, select a volume.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Remove Mappings from Volume. The Remove
Mappings from Volume wizard appears.
3 Select the mapping(s) to remove.
4 Click Continue. The mappings confirmation page appears.
5 Click Remove Mappings Now. If a mapping is still active, System Manager asks you to
confirm. Before removing the mapping, confirm that the volume is no longer in use by
the server. If you remove a mapping to a volume that is in use, the server will no longer
have access to the volume and will have read/write errors.
26
Using Advanced Mapping Options

To view advanced options, make sure that Allow Advanced Mapping is enabled in your
User Volume Mapping Defaults.
Select a Logical Unit Number

Use the Advanced Mapping options to specify the LUN to use when mapping a volume to
a server.
1 In the System Tree, expand the Storage node and select an unmapped volume.
3 Select the server to which to map the volume and click Continue.
4 In the Map Volume to Server confirmation page, click Advanced. The Advanced
option page appears.
5 Click Advanced. The Advanced options page appears.
Note: Advanced options available differ depending on server and Storage Center
configuration. The options you see may differ from options displayed on the sample
window shown below.
Dell Compellent
27
Chapter 2 Volumes
6 Select a Logical Unit Number.
If the volume you are mapping is a boot volume, select Map Volume using LUN 0.
LUN 0 is reserved for boot volumes. If the volume you are mapping is not a boot
volume, make sure this option is cleared. If a volume has already been mapped to
the selected server using LUN 0, this option does not appear.
To map the selected volume to the server using a specific LUN, select and enter a
LUN.
By default, Storage Center uses a different LUN if the specified LUN is already in
use. To use the next available LUN, select Use Next Available LUN. If you do not
want to use a different LUN when the specified LUN is already in use, clear Use Next
Available LUN.
7 Click Continue.
See Also
Set Mapping Volume Defaults on page 324
Restrict Mapping Paths

These options appear only when mapping a volume to a server with multiple server HBA
ports, when mapping a a volume to a server on a dual-controller Storage Center, or when
mapping a volume to a virtual server.
1 In the System Tree, select an unmapped volume. Expand the storage node if
necessary.
2 Select the server to which to map the volume and click Continue.
Note: Advanced options available differ depending on server and Storage Center
configuration. The options you see may differ from options displayed on the sample
window shown below.
28
4 Choose the option that applies to the type of server to which you are mapping this
volume:
If the selected server has HBA ports of different transport types (such as Fibre
Channel and iSCSI), the Only map using a specified transport type option
appears. To map a volume using a specified transport type, select the check box and
select the transport type to use.
If the selected server has multiple server HBA ports, the Only map using specified
server ports option appears. To map a volume using specified server ports, select
the check box and select the ports to use.
To map a volume to a specific controller, select the Map to controller checkbox and
select a controller.
To map a volume to a host on a virtual server, select whether to map the volume to
the Host only, Virtual server only, or Both host and virtual server.
5 Click Continue.
Dell Compellent
29
Chapter 2 Volumes
Configure Multipathing
Use the Map Volume to Server wizard to set the number of paths to use for multipathing.
Note: If the server operating system does not support multi-pathing, this option is
not displayed.
necessary.
4 Select the maximum number of paths used to map the selected volume to the server.
The maximum number of paths allowed may be limited by the servers operating
system.
5 Click Continue.
Create a Read-Only Volume

To prevent data from being written to a volume, set the properties to be read-only.
necessary.
4 Under Configure Volume Use, select the check box to present this volume as read-only.
5 Click Continue.
Create Mapping to Down Server Ports

This selection appears only if the selected server has down ports.
necessary.
4 Under Down Server Ports select the check box to enable mapping to down server ports.
5 Click Continue.
30
Managing Volumes
Managing Volumes
This section describes tasks for maintaining and managing volumes after they are set up
and mapped to servers.
Enable Import Data to Lowest Tier Mode

Use Import Data to Lowest Tier to write large amounts of data to the lowest tier of storage
configured for a volume. This is useful when performing an operating-system-level copy of
data to a Storage Center volume from a server-attached data source. No Replays are taken
for the volume during data import. If this option is cleared, by default data is written to the
highest tier of storage configured for the volume.
1 In the System Tree, select a target volume.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box
appears.
3 Click the Advanced tab. The Volume Properties dialog box displays advanced
options.
Dell Compellent
31
Chapter 2 Volumes
4 Select the Import data to lowest tier of storage checkbox. When this checkbox is
selected, data is written to the lowest tier of storage available based upon the
configuration of the storage profile of the volume. No Replays are taken for the volume
during data import. If this option is cleared, by default, data is written to the highest tier
of storage configured for the volume.
Note: Import mode is not allowed for volumes that are mapped to another
Storage Center for use as Replication destinations. The Import data to lowest tier
of storage option is not displayed on the Volume Properties screen. Importing
data is managed in Enterprise Manager as part of the Replication to that volume.
For more information, see the Enterprise Manager User Guide.
In the System Explorer, information about the volume that is set for importing data to
the lowest tier appears with a message stating that data is being imported to the lowest
tier of storage.
32
Managing Volumes
While a volume is in Import to lowest tier mode, replays are not taken for that volume.
Replays are resumed when the volume is taken out of import mode.
Note: After data is imported, it is your responsibility to take the volume out of
Import to lowest tier mode.
Disable Import to Lowest Tier Mode

After data is imported to the lowest tier, return the volume to normal operating mode.
1 Select the volume that has been placed into import to lowest tier mode. From the
shortcut menu, select Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
2 Clear the Import data to lowest tier of storage checkbox.
3 Click OK. The volume is no longer in import mode.
Dell Compellent
33
Chapter 2 Volumes
Create a Boot from SAN Volume

Boot from SAN dramatically reduces the time to recover servers by creating and storing
Replays of the boot volume at the disaster recovery site. The Boot from SAN function
allows servers to use an external SAN volume as the boot volume for the server. In the
event of a failure, power up a spare server, point the server to a boot image on the SAN,
and boot the server up.
Prerequisites
To use the Create Boot from SAN Copy wizard, you must already have a boot from SAN
volume created and in use. A boot from SAN volume is operating system-dependent and
requires the server HBA to be specifically configured and enabled to boot from the SAN.
See your respective operating system and HBA provider to create this configuration.
Steps
1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume Create Boot from SAN Copy.
The Create Boot from SAN Volume wizard starts.
2 Click Continue. A page asking you to select a source volume appears.

3 Select a source volume from the list of volumes.
4 Click Continue. The next page prompts you for the name and folder for the volume.
5 Select a name and folder or accept the default.
6 Click Continue. The next page prompts you to create a Replay.
34
Managing Volumes
7 Click Create Now. The Map Volume to Server wizard starts.
8 Create a new server or server cluster, or accept the defaults.

9 Click Continue. A confirmation page appears.
Dell Compellent
35
Chapter 2 Volumes
10 (Optional) Click Advanced to set Advanced Mapping options, which allow you to:
Enter a logical unit number (LUN).
Restrict mapping paths
Configure volume use as read-only
11 Click Create Now. The boot from SAN volume is created.
If Data Instant Replay is enabled, select or change a Replay Profile attached to the
volume.
If Data Progression is licensed, select a Storage Profile attached to this volume.
See Also
Change Volume Space Consumption Limit

Use this option to limit the size of the selected volume.
appears with the General tab selected.
3 Click the Advanced tab.
4 Select or clear the Enforce Volume Space Consumption Limit check box.
5 Enter a Space Consumption Limit value and select the units.
6 Click OK.
Allow Replays to Coalesce

Use this option to change the setting that allows Replays to coalesce into an active Replay.
appears with the General tab selected.
4 Select or clear the Allow Replays to coalesce into active Replay check box.
5 Click OK.
Reset VMS Unique Disk ID

If there are volumes on storage running the Open VMS operating system, this tab displays
the Unique Disk ID (UQ ID) used to identify the volume.
You may need to reset this value when recovering a volume from a Replay. For example,
if you mapped a volume to a server, took a Replay, and then mounted a new view volume
up to the server; the new view volume would have a new Disk ID and you would have to
modify the value to match the original Disk ID for the volume before the server will
recognize it as the same volume.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box appears
with the General tab selected.
4 Enter the UQ ID.
5 Click OK.
36
Managing Volumes
Change Volume Cache Properties

Data caching can be set at the volume level, however caching that is set Storage Centerwide overwrites individual volume cache settings.
Note: Because an SSD is itself a memory device, Dell Compellent recommends
disabling write cache for all volumes using SSDs to maximize performance for most
applications.
Disabling read cache for volumes using SSDs is application-specific and may or
may not improve performance. Dell Compellent recommends testing applications
prior to disabling read cache.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box appears
3 Click the Cache tab.
4 Do one of the following:
Select or clear the Enable Write Cache checkbox. When enabled, write
performance increases by holding written data in volatile memory until it can be
safely stored on disk.
Select or clear the Enable Read Cache checkbox. When enabled, read
performance is improved by anticipating the next read and then holding it in volatile
memory.
5 Click OK to save changes.
Rename a Volume
Follow these steps to change the volume name.
2 Click Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab
selected.
3 Enter a new name for the folder.
4 Click OK.
Add Notes to a Volume Folder

Follow these steps to add notes to the volume properties.
2 Click Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab
selected.
3 Click the Info tab.
4 Enter information about the volume in the Notes field.
5 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
37
Chapter 2 Volumes
Delete a Volume
Follow these steps to delete a volume and move it to the Recycle Bin. You can recover the
volume from the Recycle Bin, but after the Recycle Bin is emptied, data on that volume
cannot be recovered.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager informs you if the volume is
actively mapped to a server and asks you to confirm.
Caution: If you select the Skip Recycle Bin and delete volume check box, the
volume and metadata are immediately deleted and cannot be recovered.
Selecting this check box is not recommended.
3 Click Yes. The volume is deleted.
Delete Multiple Volumes

Follow these steps to delete multiple volumes from within a volume folder.
1 In the System Tree, select a volume folder. The list of volumes appears in the main
frame.
2 Select volumes to delete by holding down the Shift key or Ctrl key and clicking on
volumes.
3 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager warns you if a volume is
mapped to a server and prompts you to confirm the deletion.
4 Click Yes. The volumes are deleted.
38
Managing Volumes
Restore a Deleted Volume

When a volume is deleted, it is moved to the Recycle Bin. You can restore a deleted volume
from the Recycle Bin. However, after the Recycle Bin is emptied, items that were in the bin
cannot be restored.
1 In the System Tree, expand the Volumes node to view volume components including
the Recycle Bin node.
2 Expand the Recycle Bin node. The Recycle Bin lists restorable volumes.
3 Select the volume to be restored.
4 From the shortcut menu, select Restore Volume. The volume is restored, but previous
mappings are not restored.
Empty the Recycle Bin

Deleting a volume moves data on the volume to the Recycle Bin. You can recover data from
the Recycle Bin until the Recycle Bin is emptied. After the Recycle Bin is emptied, you can
no longer recover the data.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume Empty Recycle Bin. System
Manager lists items in the recycle bin and asks you to confirm.
2 Click Yes. The Recycle Bin is emptied.
Expand a Volume
Virtual capacity can be expanded to be greater than the physical capacity.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Expand Volume. The Expand Volume wizard starts.
3 Specify the new size for the volume in the New Volume Size field.
4 Click Expand Volume Now.
Dell Compellent
39
Chapter 2 Volumes
Managing Volume Folders

Use Volume folders to group volumes based on the way you want to control user access.
You can control access to volume folders and volumes through a combination of User
Groups and User Privileges.
Create a Volume Folder

Follow these steps to create a volume folder.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select Create Folder Volume Folder. The
Create Volume Folder wizard starts.
2 Select whether to create the folder at the root level or within another folder.
3 Enter a volume folder name, or accept the default name.

5 Click Create Now. The volume folder is created.
Rename a Volume Folder

Follow these steps to change a volume folder name.
1 In the System Tree, expand Volumes.
2 Select a volume folder.
3 Click Properties. The Volume Folder Properties dialog box appears with the General
tab selected.
4 Enter a new name for the folder in the Volume Folder field.
5 Click OK.
40
Managing Volume Folders
Add Notes to a Volume Folder

Follow these steps to add notes to the volume properties.
3 Click Properties. The Volume Folder Properties dialog box appears with the General
tab selected.
5 Enter information about the folder in the Notes field.
6 Click OK.
Delete a Volume Folder

You cannot delete a volume folder that contains volumes, other volume folders, or is
referenced by volumes that are in the Recycle Bin.
3 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager asks you to confirm.
4 Click Yes. The folder is deleted.
Move Volumes to a Folder

Follow these steps to move a volume or volumes to a different folder.
2 Select a volume folder, or select multiple volumes by holding down the <Shift> key or
<Ctrl> key and clicking on each volume.
3 From the shortcut menu, select Move to Folder. The Move Volume(s) wizard starts.
4 From the list of folders, select a folder to which to move the volume.
6 Click Move Now. The volumes are moved to the selected folder.
Apply Replay Profiles to Volumes

Replays create space-efficient point-in-time copies (PITC) to provide immediate recovery
from data loss.
1 In the System Tree, select a server.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Apply Replay Profiles to Volumes. A list of Replay
Profiles appears.
Dell Compellent
41
Chapter 2 Volumes
3 Select one or more Relay Profiles or create a new Replay Profile.

4 Choose to replace existing Replay Profiles attached to the volumes mapped to this
server or not.
5 Click Save Configuration. The Replay Profiles are attached.
See Also
Creating Replay Profiles on page 62.
Using Copy, Mirror, and Migrate Functions

Data can be moved from one volume to another using any of three methodscopy, mirror,
or migratedepending on the intended result. These functions move data within a Storage
Center.
Copy a Volume
Copy copies data from a source volume to a destination volume. Changes made to the
source volume during the copy process are added to the destination volume. Copy does
not dynamically update the destination volume after the copy is completed.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Copy Copy Volume. The Copy Volume wizard
starts.
3 In the Copy Volume wizard, select one of the following:
Select a Destination Volume: Copies the source volume to the selected destination
volume. The destination volume cannot be smaller than the source volume and
cannot be mapped to a server.
Create New Volume: Creates a new volume to be the destination of the copy
operation.
Create Exact Duplicate: Creates a volume with the same attributes as the source
volume. The duplicate volume is immediately created.
See Also
42
Using Copy, Mirror, and Migrate Functions
Mirror a Volume
Mirror dynamically updates the destination volume when the source volume changes. The
source and destination volumes are kept synchronized.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Copy Mirror Volume. The Mirror Volume wizard
starts.
3 In the Mirror Volume wizard, select one of the following:
Select a Destination Volume: To mirror the source volume to an existing volume,

select a destination volume from the list of volumes displayed. The destination
volume cannot be smaller than the source volume and cannot be mapped to a
server.
Create New Volume: Creates a new volume to be the destination of the mirror
operation.
Create Exact Duplicate: Creates a volume with the same attributes as the source
See Also
Dell Compellent
43
Chapter 2 Volumes
Migrate a Volume
Migrate is the same as Copy, except that when the copy is finished, all volume-to-server
mappings are moved to the destination volume and the source volume is deleted. The
copied data (and its mappings) now reside on the destination volume. Copy/Migrate first
copies data from the source volume to the destination volume. Changes to the source
volume while the copy is in progress are reflected in the destination volume. When System
Manager is finished with the copy, all volume-to-server mappings are moved to the
destination volume.
2 From the volume shortcut menu, select Copy Copy/Migrate. The Copy/Migrate
Volume wizard starts.
3 In the Copy/Migrate Volume wizard, select one of the following:
Select a Destination Volume: Migrate the source volume to an existing destination

volume from the list of volumes displayed. The destination volume cannot be smaller
than the source volume and cannot be mapped to a server.
Create New Volume: Create a new volume to be the destination of the migrate
operation.
Create Exact Duplicate: Create a volume with the same attributes as the source
4 To migrate data to an existing volume, select a destination volume from the list of
volumes displayed. The destination volume cannot be smaller than the source volume.
The destination volume cannot be mapped to a server.
5 Click Continue. Copy/Migrate options are displayed.
(Conditional) Click Continue to migrate now. A review page appears.
(Conditional) Click Start to mirror the volume now.
(Conditional) Click Schedule to schedule the migration at a later time. Enter a date
and time. Click Schedule Now.
See Also
44
Using the Topology Explorer

With Topology Explorer you can easily map volumes to servers and external (remote)
Storage Centers by dragging one component to another.
Open the Topology Explorer

Follow these steps to open and navigate the Topology Explorer.
1 From the View menu, select Topology Explorer. The Topology Explorer displays
objects associated with the Storage Center: servers in the left column, volumes in the
middle column and external Storage Center in the right column. If a Replication is in
process, connections between the volumes and the Remote volume to which they are
replicating are also shown.
Dell Compellent
45
Chapter 2 Volumes
2 Click on the Connections icon to toggle between Show All Connections and Show
Connections for Selected Object Only.
3 Click on the Folders icon in the upper right to toggle between displaying and hiding
folders.
46
Note: When the Topology Explorer displays folders, two additional command
objects appear at the bottom of the window: Create New Server Folder and Create
New Volume Folder.
Create a Volume in the Topology Explorer

Follow these steps to start the Create Volume wizard.
1 Drag the New Volume command object to the Topology Explorer. The Create
Volume wizard starts.
2 Follow the Create Volume wizard instructions.
Create a Volume Folder in the Topology Explorer

Follow these steps to start the Create Volume Folder wizard.
1 Make sure the Show Folders toggle is enabled and the Show Folder command object
appears.
2 Drag the New Volume Folder command object to the Topology Explorer. The Create
Volume Folder wizard starts.
3 Follow the Create Volume Folder wizard instructions.
Map a Volume to a Server in the Topology Explorer

Follow these steps to start the Map Volume to Server wizard.
1 Drag a server onto a volume or drag a volume onto a server. The Map Volume to
Server wizard starts.
2 Follow the Map Volume to Server wizard instructions.
Create an External Device with the Topology Explorer

Follow these steps to start the Classify Disk as External Device wizard.
1 Drag the New External Device command object to the Topology Explorer. The
Classify Disk as External Device wizard starts.
2 Follow the Classify Disk as External Device wizard instructions.
Dell Compellent
47
Chapter 2 Volumes
User Interface Reference for Volumes

This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show volume
information.
Volumes or Volume Folders

When you select a Volume or Volume Folder, System Manager lists the volumes associated
with the selection.
Field
Description
Name
Name of the volume or folder.
Type
Object type volume or a volume folder.
Status
Shows volume status Up or Down.
Status Information
If an element is down, displays reason it is down. Also displays the

controller on which the volume is active.
Volume Type
48
A Volume Type may be one of the following:
Dynamic Write: A volume for which no Replays have been

taken. Exists on the Storage Center as a read/write volume. Data
Progression manages the volume allocations in configure
Volume Active space only.
Replay Enabled: A volume that has at least one Replay. A

Replay-enabled volume consists of two different layers of
volume space: Active (writable) and Replay (historical, or readonly). After a Replay is taken on a volume, the active data that
exists on that volume is marked as read-only and is moved to the
Tier and Class that is configured for Replays. New data written
to the volume after the Replay is written to active portion of the
volume; however the Replay area may still be accessible for
reads. As more changes to the volume occur (as writes in the
active space) and as more Replays are taken, some of the
Replay data may become inaccessible. This is known as Replay
overhead. This data can be made available by creating a view
volume to allow for data recovery or backups.
Replication: Target volume being replicated from another

Storage Center.
Logical Size
Logical size of the volume.
Replay Profile
Name of Replay profile attached to the volume.
Field
Description
Storage Profile
Name of Storage Profile attached to the volume.
Storage Type
Default is 2 MB Redundant.
Disk Folder
Name of folder the volume in which the volume reside (if any).
See Also
Viewing Volume Information on page 14
Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type on page 210
Dell Compellent
49
Chapter 2 Volumes
Volume General Tab

Selecting a volume in the System Tree opens the main window with a set of tabs across
the top. Each tab provides information about the volume. The Volume General tab provides
an overview of the selected volume.
Note: Tabs displayed may differ depending on features licensed on your Storage
Center.
Field
Description
Name
Name of the volume.
Index
Number used by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with

component identification.
Size
Size of the volume.
Serial Number
Volume Serial Number (VSN).
Folder
Disk folder that the volume uses for storage, in any.
Volume Type
May be one of the following:
Active: Volume for which no Replays have been taken.
Replay Enabled: Volume for which a Replay has been taken.
Disk Folder
Folder the volume uses for storage (if any).
Status
Volume status Up or Down. Also displays the name of the

controller on which the volume is active.
If a volume is not mapped to a server, System Manager displays the
message: Down (currently inactive - map to a server to activate).
50
Field
Description
Replay Profiles
Replay Profiles used for this volume (if any).
Storage Profile
Profile attached to this volume.
Cache Settings
Settings enabled for various read/write operations.
Volume Statistics
Number of requests, blocks, and errors for read/write operations.
Date Created / Date Updated Date of creation/update and by whom.

Notes
Optional notes about the volume.
See Also
Viewing Volume Information on page 14
Dell Compellent
51
Chapter 2 Volumes
Volume Mapping Tab

The volume Mapping tab shows to what server the selected volume is mapped. Use this
tab to add, change, or delete volume mapping.
Field
Description
Server
Name of the server to which the volume is mapped.
Folder Path
Name and path of volume folder (if applicable).
Status
Indicates whether the link is Up or Down.
Type
Transport type: FC or iSCSI.
Server Port
WWN of the server port to which the volume is mapped.
Controller Port
WWN of the controller port to which the volume is mapped.
LUN
Logical unit number assigned (if applicable).
Read Only
Indicates whether the advanced option is set to make the volume

Read Only.
See Also
Map a Volume to a Server on page 24
Map Multiple Volumes to a Server or Server Cluster on page 25
Map a Volume to Remote System on page 26
Remove Mappings from a Volume on page 26
52
Volume Copy/Mirror/Migrate Tab

The Copy/Mirror/Migrate tab shows status and history of CMMs for the Volume.
Field
Description
Type
Specifies the type of CMM operation: copy, mirror, or migrate.
State
Specifies the state of a CMM operation: down, running, or synched
Priority
Specifies the priority of a CMM operation: high, medium, or low.
Source Volume
Name of volume from which data is being copied.
Destination Volume
Name of volume to which data is being copied.
Percent Synced
Percentage that destination volume matches source volume.
Remaining
Percentage of data left to copy.
Current Replay
ID of latest Replay.
Copy History
History of Replays.
Delete After Migrate
Indicates wether source volume is deleted after a copy.
Reverse Mirror After Migrate
Copy back to original source after migrate.
See Also
Copy a Volume on page 42
Mirror a Volume on page 43
Migrate a Volume on page 44
Dell Compellent
53
Chapter 2 Volumes
Replication Tab
Replications are managed by Enterprise Manager. You can view replication status during
the replication process.
Note: The Replication tab appears only if the volume is currently being replicated.
54
Display
Description
List of Replications
In the top frame, the System Manager displays a list of replications

for the volume.
Replication Information
From the list of replications in the top frame, select a replication. The
main pane displays information about that replication.
Replication History
In the right frame, the System Manager displays the replications that
were taken of that volume on the remote Storage Center you
selected from the list of replications.
Volume Replay Tab

When you select the Replay tab in the Volume view, System Manager displays Replay
history for the selected volume.
Field
Description
Freeze Time
Point in time when Replay was taken.
Expiration Time
Date and time when Replay will expire.
Replay Size
Amount of disk space used.
Description
Replay schedule.
State
Whether replay is Active, Frozen, or Expiring.
Source
How the replay was created. See the icons following this table.
Create Volume
Volume name.
Space Recovery Run
Whether Enterprise Manager Server Agent Space Recovery program

was run.
The key at the bottom of the window describes the icons used.
Icon
Description
Replay created by a user.
Replay created automatically from a Replay Profile.
Replay created from an external application program.
Replay created through a Replication from a remote Storage Center.
Type of replay: Consistent or Non-consistent.
Replay is nearing expiration date.
Replay is coalescing with other data.
Dell Compellent
55
Chapter 2 Volumes
See Also
Replay Profiles on page 59
Volume Statistics Tab

The volume Statistics tab shows disk space usage information for the selected volume.
56
Field
Description
Volume Space Active
Volume space utilized by the data that has been written before a
Replay is taken.
Disk Space Active
Total disk space including RAID overhead that is being used by this
volume.
Volume Space Replay
Space used by Replays, including accessible and inaccessible

Replay space.
Disk Space Replay
Total disk space, including RAID overhead, being used by this

volume.
Total volume space

consumed
Sum of all volume space bars on the chart.
Data Instant Replay

overhead
That part of Volume Space Replay that is inaccessible. This

inaccessible data is previous pages that have been subsequently
written to but are still parts of previous Replays. (Total volume
space consumed minus Data instant Replay overhead equals the
total volume space that would be consumed if all Replays were to be
expired.)
Total disk space consumed
Equals Disk Space Replay plus Disk Space Active.
Disk space saved vs. basic

RAID 10 storage
Display of storage savings through the effective use of RAID 5 rather

than RAID 10. The difference between volume space consumed and
disk space consumed is the space required for RAID parity. For
example, a RAID 10 volume is written twice. The disk space required
is twice the volume space required. Disk space is required for RAID
5 parity blocks that is not used in the volume space.
See Also
View Volume Statistics on page 11
Volume Charts Tab

The volume Charts tab displays read and write performance for the most current one-hour
period. The upper chart shows the data transfer rate in KB/second. The lower chart shows
the overall IO rate in IOs/second.
Red Line: Reads
Blue Line: Writes
Green Line: Combined
See Also
View Volume Charts on page 11
Dell Compellent
57
Chapter 2 Volumes
Portable Volume
The Portable Volume node appears at the same level in the tree as the Storage node.
Field
Description
Name
Portable Volume to destination Storage Center name.
Classification
USB.
Capacity
Total capacity of the disk.
Free Space
Remaining free disk capacity.
% Full
Used disk capacity expressed as a percentage.
Allocated
Disk space allocated to the portable volume.
Control Type
Removable.
Health
Status of the disk.
Vendor
Disk vendor name.
Product
Disk product name.
Serial Number
Disk serial number.
See Also
Portable Volume Node on page 16
58
Replay Profiles
A Replay Profile is a collection of rules describing when to take periodic Replays for one or
more volumes and the time at which Replays are deleted (expired). Replays create spaceefficient point-in-time copies (PITC) to provide immediate recovery from data loss. Storage
Center Replays differ from the traditional PITCs because blocks of data or pages are frozen
and not copied. No user data is moved, making the process efficient in both time taken to
complete the Replay, and space used by Replays. This process is called Data Instant
Replay and is a licensed Storage Center Feature.
Contents
Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Creating Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Modifying Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Working with Replays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Recovering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Dell Compellent
59
Chapter 3 Replay Profiles
Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes

All Storage Centers come with two common default Replay Profiles: Daily and Sample You
are not required to create any custom Replay Profiles.
Daily Replay Profile

The rules for the standard Daily Replay Profile are as follows:
The standard Daily Replay Profile takes a Replay once a day at one minute past
midnight (12:01 AM) of all volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached.
Each Replay automatically expires in one week.
Sample Replay Profile

The Sample Replay Profile takes three Replays for all volumes to which the Replay Profile
is attached. The rules for the Standard Default Sample Replay Profile are as follows:
Monthly Replays are taken on the first day of the month. Monthly Replays automatically
expire after 26 weeks.
Weekly Replays are taken on Saturday at 11:30 PM. Weekly Replays automatically
expire after 5 weeks.
Daily Replays are taken every twelve hours between 12:05 AM and 6:00 PM. Daily
Replays automatically expire after 5 days.
Note: If multiple Replays are scheduled to run at the same time, System Manager
takes a single Replay that includes the multiple Replays, running the Replay with the
latest scheduled expiration time.
See Also
Creating Replay Profiles on page 62
60
Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes
Apply a Replay Profile to a Volume

One or more Replay Profiles can be applied to one or more volumes. After a Replay Profile
is applied to volumes, subsequent changes to the Replay Profile are applied to all the
volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached.
1 In the System Tree, select Storage Replay Profiles.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Apply to Volume(s). The Apply Replay Profile wizard
starts, listing volumes.
3 Expand volume folders, if necessary.
4 Select volumes to which to apply the profile.

5 If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles already in use by the
selected volumes, select the Replace Existing Replay Profiles check box.
If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay Profiles already in use by
the selected volumes, clear the Replace Existing Replay Profiles check box.
7 Click Apply Now.
Note: Subsequent changes to the Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes
using the Replay Profile. Changes to the rules for taking a Replay only affect
Replays taken in the future. Changes to the rules for expiring Replays go into
effect immediately for all Replays created by the profile.
Dell Compellent
61
Creating Replay Profiles

Replay Profiles are a collection of rules describing when to take periodic Replays for one
or more volumes and how long before Replays are deleted (expired). A Replay Profile can
contain multiple rules. For example, a Replay Profile can require a Replay to be taken once
a day, once a week, or once a month.
Changes to the rules for taking a Replay only affect Replays taken in the future.
Changes to the rules for expiring Replays go into effect immediately for all Replays
created by the Replay Profile.
Storage Center has two types of Replay Profiles: Consistent and Non-Consistent.
Consistent Replay Profile
Non-Consistent Replay Profile
Halts IO across all volumes as a group
Halts I/O for each volume independently of other

volumes.
Resource intensive
Less resource intensive depends on the amount

of data written since the previous Replay
Limited to 40 volumes
No limit to the number of volumes to which the

Replay Profile is attached
Replays are taken of all volumes simultaneously Choose between Serial (one volume at a time) or
Parallel (all volumes simultaneously)
Can set an Alert if Replays cannot be completed All Replays are taken
within a defined time. Replays not completed
before alert is generated are not taken. (This
can lead to incomplete groups of Replays
across volumes.)
62
Can delete incomplete group of Replays
All Replays are taken
Can be converted to Non-Consistent Replay

Profile
Can be converted to Consistent Replay Profile
Create a Non-Consistent Replay Profile

Non-Consistent Replays halt I/O for each volume independently of other volumes.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Replay Profile. The Create Replay Profile
wizard starts.
3 Enter a Name for the Replay Profile in the Name field.

4 Enter any notes about the Replay Profile (up to 255 characters) in the Notes field.
5 Click Add Rule. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears.
6 In the Schedule Type list, select the frequency to run the Replay:
Once: Select the date and time to run the Replay and when to expire the Replay.
Daily: Either select the time to run the Replay, or select how often to run the Replay
in a specified period of time, and then select the Replay expiration time.
Weekly: Select the day(s) to run the Replay, select how often to run the Replay, and
then select the Replay expiration time.
Monthly: Select the day(s) or date(s) of the month to run the Replay, select how
often to run the Replay, and then select the Replay expiration time. To specify the
months of the year to run the Replay, click Select Months.
7 Click Continue. The wizard displays the schedule and expiration for the rule.
8 Click Create Now. The rule is created and appears in the System Tree.
Dell Compellent
63
9 (Optional) Apply the rule:

Option
Description
Apply to Volume(s)
Select the volume(s) to which you would like to apply the selected
Replay Profile.
Apply to Server
If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay
Profiles already in use by the selected volumes, unselect the
Replace existing Replay Profiles checkbox.
If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles
already in use by the selected volumes, select the Replace
existing Replay profiles checkbox.
Select the server to which you would like to apply the selected Replay
Profile.
Note: The Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes currently
mapped to this server. If additional volumes are mapped to the server
at a later time, the Replay Profile will not be applied to those volumes.
Profiles already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected
server, unselect the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox.
already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected server,
select the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox.

11 Click Apply Now.
64
Create a Consistent Replay Profile

Consistent Replay Profiles maintain a consistent set of Replay data across multiple
volumes. To ensure consistency, volume IO is halted for all volumes to which the Replay
Profile is attached.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Consistent Replay Profile. The Create
Consistent Replay Profile wizard starts with a warning that Consistent Replay Profiles
can cause IO time outs.
3 Click Continue. The Create Consistent Replay Profile wizard starts.
4 Enter a name for the Rule in the Name field.
Dell Compellent
65
5 Enter notes (up to 255 characters) about the Replay profile in the Notes field.
7 In the Schedule Type list, select the frequency to run the Replay:
Once: Select the date and time to run the Replay and when to expire the Replay.
Daily: Either select the time to run the Replay, or select how often to run the Replay
in a specified period of time, and then select the Replay expiration time.
Weekly: Select the day(s) to run the Replay, select how often to run the Replay, and
then select the Replay expiration time.
Monthly: Select the day(s) or date(s) of the month to run the Replay, select how
often to run the Replay, and then select the Replay expiration time. To specify the
months of the year to run the Replay, click Select Months.
9 Click Create Now. The rule is created and appears in the System Tree.
10 (Optional) Apply the rule:
Option
Description
Apply to Volume(s)
Select the volume(s) to which you would like to apply the selected
Replay Profile.
Apply to Server
Profiles already in use by the selected volumes, unselect the
Replace existing Replay Profiles checkbox.
already in use by the selected volumes, select the Replace
existing Replay profiles checkbox.
Select the server to which you would like to apply the selected Replay
Profile.
Note: The Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes currently
mapped to this server. If additional volumes are mapped to the server
at a later time, the Replay Profile will not be applied to those volumes.
Profiles already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected
server, unselect the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox.
already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected server,
select the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox.

12 Click Apply Now.
66
Schedule a One-time Replay

Follow these steps to create a Replay that will run one time.
wizard starts.
6 In the Schedule Type list, select Once for a one-time Replay Profile.
7 Enter a time period in minutes, hours, days, or weeks after which the Replay will expire.
9 Click Create Now. The Replay Profile appears in the list of Profiles.
Schedule a Daily Replay

Follow these steps to create a Replay that will at the same time each day.
wizard starts.
6 In the Schedule Type list, select Daily for a daily Replay Profile.
7 Choose a time for a Daily Replay Profile: either once a day or at a chosen time.
Once a Day: Click in the Hour or Minute field. Select the up or down arrows to scroll
to the time when the Replay will be taken.
Selected Daily Time Period: Enter a time interval in hours or minutes. To restrict daily
Replay Profiles, select the hours between which the Replay is taken.
8 Enter an expiration interval in minutes, hours, days, or weeks after which the Replay will
expire.
9 Click Continue.
10 Enter a name or accept the default. Enter any notes (up to 255 characters).
Schedule a Weekly Replay

Follow these steps to create a Replay that will run at the same time each week.
wizard starts.
6 In the Schedule Type list, select Weekly.
Dell Compellent
67
7 Select one or more days of the week.

8 Select either a time each day for a Replay, or an interval. If you select an interval, you
can limit the number of Replays by choosing the hours during which Replays will be
taken.
9 Chose an expiration interval in minutes, hours, days, or weeks after which the Replays
expire.
10 Click Continue. The next page displays the schedule and expiration for the rule.
Schedule a Monthly Replay

Follow these steps to create a Replay that will at the same time each month, either on the
same day of the month or on the same date each month.
wizard starts.
6 In the Schedule Type list, select Monthly.
Monthly By Day
a Click the red Days tab.
b Select one or more days of the week to schedule the Replay.
c Select one or more weeks of the month to schedule the Replay.
d Select the time of day to run the Replay or select how often to run the Replay and
the hours during which the Replay can run.
Monthly By Date
a Click the blue Date tab.
b Select one or more dates to schedule Replays.
c Select the time of day to run the Replay or select how often to run the Replay and
the hours during which the Replay can run.
d Chose an expiration interval after which the Replay will be deleted.
a To specify the months of the year to run the Replay, click Select Months and select
one or more months in the dialog box and click OK.
7 Click Continue.
8 Click Create Now. The page displays the schedule and lifetime for the Replay.
68
Modifying Replay Profiles

Any custom Replay Profile can be changed. The default Daily and Sample profiles cannot
be modified.
View Volumes Attached to a Replay Profile

Follow these steps to see which volumes are running a specific Replay Profile.
1 In the System Tree, select a Replay Profile.
2 In the main pane, click the Volumes tab. System Manager displays all volumes attached
to the profile.
View Replays Attached to a Volume

Follow these steps to see a list of Replays that have been run on a specific volume.
2 Click the Replays tab. System Manager displays a list of Replays for the volume.
3 (Optional) Modify the display by selecting any of the following:
RefreshRefreshes the display.
Set Update FrequencyAllows you to turn off updates or set a new frequency.
Set Replay ViewToggles between the default view and volume tree view.
Set Display FieldAllows you to reorder display fields.
Modify Volume MaximumsOpens the Modify Volume Maximums wizard.
See Also
Modify Volume Maximums on page 74
Dell Compellent
69
View Individual Replay Properties

Follow these steps to see general information about a Replay Profile.
1 In the System Tree, select a volume. The main pane displays general volume
information.
2 Click the Replays tab. System Manager displays a list of Replays for that volume.
3 From the list of Replays, select a specific Replay.
4 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Replay Properties dialog box
appears.
5 If you change expiration time or description, click OK.
Change Profile Schedule

Follow these steps to change a Replay schedule.
1 Select a Replay Profile.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Modify. The Modify Replay Profile wizard starts.
3 Select a Rule in the Replay Profile.
4 Click Modify Rule.
5 Change the frequency of the Replay.
6 Click Continue.
7 Click Apply Changes. System Manager changes the rule.
70
Change Profiles Attached to a Volume

Follow these steps to add a Replay Profile to a volume.
1 In the System Tree, select a Replay Profile.
2 Click the Volumes tab.
3 Select the volume(s) to change.
4 Click Configure Data Instant Replay in the main pane. The Configure Data Instant
Replay wizard starts and displays all Replay Profiles.
5 Choose profiles to attach to the selected volume(s). A cumulative list of Replay

schedules for all selected profiles appears in the bottom frame.
6 Click Save Configuration to apply the Replay Profiles to the volumes or click Create a
New Replay Profile.
See Also
Dell Compellent
71
Remove a Rule from a Replay Profile

Follow these steps to delete a rule from a Replay Profile.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Modify. The Modify Replay Profile wizard starts.
3 Select a rule to remove from the Replay Profile.
4 Click Remove Rule. The Rule no longer appears in the Schedule Rules of the Replay
Profile.
5 Click Apply Changes. System Manager removes the rule. The Replay Profile page
reappears, showing that the Rule is deleted.
Rename a Replay Profile

Follow these steps to change the name of a Replay Profile.
Note: Renaming a Replay Profile does not change profile rules.
1 Select a Replay Profile. From the shortcut menu, select Modify. The Modify Replay
Profile wizard starts.
2 In the Name field, enter a new name.
3 Click Apply Changes. The Replay Profile page reappears, showing the new Replay
Profile name.
Change a Non-Consistent Replay Profile to a Consistent

Replay Profile
Follow these steps to change a Non-Consistent Profile to a Consistent Profile.
1 In the System Tree, select the Replay Profile to change.
2 From the Shortcut menu, select Convert to Consistent Replay Profile. System
Manager describes Consistent Replay Profiles.
3 Click Convert Now. The Replay Profile is changed from Non-Consistent to Consistent.
Change a Consistent Replay Profile to a Non-Consistent

Replay Profile
Follow these steps to change a Consistent Profile to a Non-Consistent Profile.
1 In the System Tree, select the Replay Profile to change.
2 From the Shortcut menu, select Convert to Non-Consistent Replay Profile. System
Manager describes Consistent Replay Profiles.
3 Click Convert Now. The Replay Profile is changed from Consistent to NonConsistent.
Detach Volumes from a Replay Profile

Before you can delete a profile, you must first detach all associated volumes.
2 Select the Replay Profile attached to the volume to change.
3 In the main pane, click the Volumes tab to view a list of volumes that use the selected
Replay.
72
4 Select a volume.
5 Click Configure Data Instant Replay.
A list of Replay Profiles appears. Replay Profiles to which the volume is attached are
indicated by a check mark in the check box.
6 Clear the check box of the Replay Profile to detach it from the Volume.
7 Click Save Configuration. System Manager displays volume information.
8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for each volume. When no volumes are attached to the
Replay Profile, you can delete the profile.
Delete a Replay Profile

Follow these steps to delete a Replay Profile.
Note: You cannot delete a Replay Profile created by System Manager or a Replay
Profile currently in use by a volume(s).
2 Select a Replay Profile to remove.
3 In the main pane, click the Volumes tab to view a list of volumes that use the selected
Replay. If any volumes appear in the pane, detach them from the profile.
4 After detaching volumes, select the Replay Profile in the System Tree.
5 From the shortcut menu, select Delete.
6 System Manager prompts you to confirm.
7 Click Yes. The Replay profile is deleted.
Dell Compellent
73
Working with Replays

Replays can be modified, deleted, paused, and run independently from the schedule. This
section describes tasks for managing Replays.
Modify Volume Maximums

Use this wizard to modify the maximum number of volumes or the maximum configurable
volume space allowed for a Replay history.
Note: You cannot create additional volumes for a Replay history if the maximum
volume count or maximum configurable volume space values have been reached.
1 In the System Tree, select Storage Volumes and select a volume.
2 Click the Replays tab. System Manager displays a list of Replays for the volume.
3 Click Modify Volume Maximums.
a Modify the Maximum Volume Count.

b Modify the Maximum Configured Volume Space and select the measurement of
size using the drop-down menu.
c Check the Unlimited check box to select an unlimited amount of configured volume
space.
4 Click OK.
Expire (Delete) a Replay Explicitly

Follow these steps to manually expire a Replay without waiting for the expiration date set
in the Profile.
1 In the System Tree, select Storage Volumes and select a volume.
2 In the main pane, select the Replays tab. A list of unexpired Replays for that volume
appears.
3 Select a Replay, or use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select more than one Replay.
4 Click Expire. System Manager asks you to confirm.
5 Click Yes. The Replay is set to be expired. Replay expiration may take a few minutes,
depending on the size of the Replay.
74
Create an Immediate Replay

Replays are best used by creating a Replay Profile, attaching it to a volume, and letting
System Manager run the Replays on a set schedule. However, you can run a Replay
manually at any time.
1 In the System Tree, select Storage Volumes and select one or more volumes.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Replay Create Replay.
3 Enter an expiration interval and a description of the Replay.
4 Click Create Now. A Replay is taken of the volumes you selected.
5 Select a volume. Click Replays. The new Replay appears in the list of Replays for that
volume.
Create an Immediate Replay from a Replay Profile

Follow these steps to run a Replay using an existing Replay Profile.
3 (Optional) To view volumes, click the Volume tab. A list of volumes appears.
4 From the shortcut menu, select Create Replay for Volumes. The Create Replay for
Volumes wizard starts.
5 Enter a time for Replays to expire in minutes, hours, day, weeks, or never.
6 Click Create Now.
Dell Compellent
75
Pause a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center

Follow these steps to temporarily stop Replays on all volumes.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume Replay Pause Replay
Creation. Pausing Replay creation disables both manual and scheduled Replays for
all volumes.
2 If you are sure you want to disable Replays, click Continue. Replays are disabled.
While Pause Replay is enabled, no Replays are taken for any volumes.
Resume a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center

When all Replays are paused, the Storage Management menu changes. Follow these
steps to resume Replays.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume Replay Resume Replay
Creation. The Resume Replay Creation wizard starts.
2 Click Continue. System Manager resumes Replays.
Pause Replays for an Individual Volume

Follow these steps to temporarily stop Replays on a specific volume.
1 In the Storage Tree, select Replay Pause Replay Creation.
2 The system asks you to confirm. Click Continue. Replays are paused.
Resume Replays for an Individual Volume

A volume for which Replays have been paused appears as a Replay-paused volume.
1 In the storage tree, select Replay Resume Replay Creation.
2 Click Continue. System Manager resumes Replays for the volume.
76
Clean Up Orphaned Volume Replay Histories

Volume histories can become orphaned when the process of deleting a volume is
interrupted. When a volume history becomes orphaned, the disk space it consumes is not
released and cannot be used by other volumes. Eliminate orphaned histories to free up disk
space for other volumes.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume Clean Up Orphaned Replay
Histories. The Clean Up Orphaned Replay Histories page appears with a list of
orphaned Replays. System Manager asks you if you want to delete the orphaned
volume histories.
2 Click OK. Orphaned volume histories are deleted.
Change Volume Replay Displays

Follow these steps to change the Replay information displayed in the main pane.
1 In the System Tree, select a volume. The main pane displays volume information.
2 Click the Replay tab. (This tab appears only if Replays are scheduled for the volume.)
3 From this page, select Set Display Field. The Set Display Field menu appears.
4 Choose to display:
Dell Compellent
Freeze Time The time each Replay was taken.
Expire Time The time at which each Replay will expire.
Replay Size The size of each Replay.
Replay Description The rule that caused the Replay to be taken.
77
View a Volume Replay Calendar

Follow these steps to display a graphic schedule of Replay activity.
1 In the System Explorer pane, select a volume.
2 Click the Replay Calendar tab. The System Manager displays the Replay calendar.
Replays are color-coded.
3 Click Previous Month and Next Month to view previous or projected months. Click the
arrows to the right of the schedule to change the color of the Replay schedule bar graph.
78
Recovering Data
Recovering Data
The purpose of the Replay is to provide a point-in-time copy that you can recover if data is
lost or corrupted. This section describes the tasks required to recover data.
Create a View Volume

Create a View volume from a Replay of the volume in which the file was stored, and then
map the volume to a server.
2 Click the Replays tab. A list of Replays for that volume appears.
3 Select a Replay. From the shortcut menu, select Create Volume from Replay.
The Create Volume for Replay wizard starts.
Dell Compellent
79
4 Accept the default or enter a new name.

5 Click Create Now. The Map Volume to Server wizard starts.

7 Click Create Now. The Apply Replay Profile page appears.
8 Click Apply Replay Profile or Skip. The volume is created.
See Also
Create a Server on page 110
Create a Server Cluster on page 115
80
Recovering Data
View Consistency Groups

After a consistent Replay has been taken across selected volumes, the group created from
the consistent Replay appears in the Consistent Replay window.
1 In the System Tree, select a Consistent Replay Profile.
2 Click Consistency Group. A page appears showing the volumes attached to the group,
the freeze time, and the amount of time necessary to complete creation of all Replays
in the group.
Create Volumes from Consistency Groups

Follow these steps to create volumes from Consistency Groups.
1 In the System Tree, select a Consistent Replay Profile.
2 Click Consistency Group.
3 From the shortcut menu, select Create Volumes for Consistency Groups. The Create
Volumes for Consistency Groups wizard starts.
4 System Manager enters default names for the new volumes. Accept the default or enter
a name in the New Volume Name field.
5 System Manager assumes the volume folder will be the same as the previous folder. To
change the folder in which these volumes will be created:
a Click the expand button next to the New Volume Folder field.
b Select a new volume folder.
c Click Continue. The Create Volumes for Consistency Groups page reappears.
6 System Manager assumes the new volumes will be mapped to the same server as the
current volumes. To change the server to which these volumes will be mapped:
a Click the expand button next to the Select a Server field.
b Select a new server.
c Click Continue. The Create Volumes for Consistency Groups page reappears.
7 Click Create Now. The new volumes appear in the System Tree.
Dell Compellent
81
82
User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles
User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles

This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show Replay
information.
Replay Profile General Tab

When you select a specific Replay Profile, System Manager displays the General tab.
Field
Description
Name
Name of the profile, either as assigned by the system or by the person

creating the profile.
Index
Number used by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with object

identification.
Type
A Replay Profile can be on of the following:

Standard: Predefined by System Manager.
Custom: Created by a user.
Replay Creation
A Replay applied to more than one volume can be one of the following:
Serial: Takes a Replay one volume at a time.
Parallel: Creates a Replay of all volumes simultaneously.
Consistent
Halts IO to all volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached until

Replays are taken for each volume.
Schedule
Specifies when Replays will be taken.
Expiration
How long the Replay will be saved. Replays can also be manually expired.
See Also
Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes on page 60
Expire (Delete) a Replay Explicitly on page 74
Dell Compellent
83
Replay Profile Volumes Tab

The Volumes tab in the Replay Profile window lists all volumes currently using the selected
Replay.
Field
Description
Name
Name of the volume.
Volume Type
A Volume Type may be one of the following:
Dynamic Write: A volume for which no Replays have been

taken (see page 48).
Replay Enabled: A volume that has at least one Replay (see

page 48).
Storage Type
The standard storage type is Redundant - 2 MB.
Disk Folder
Name of the disk folder associated with the volume.
Consumed Disk Space
Amount of space used for the replay.
Logical Size
Logical size of the volume.
See Also
Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes on page 60
Change Profiles Attached to a Volume on page 71
Detach Volumes from a Replay Profile on page 72
84
Import
Thin Import is used to copy data from remote disks to Storage Center, or to migrate and
mirror data between Storage Center and a remote disk. To use the Import options, you must
create External Device objects in the Disk node of the System Tree, and create a QoS
definition.
Note: Data replication between Storage Centers is managed using Enterprise
Manager.
Contents
Setting up an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Mapping an External Device to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Importing from an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Creating and Editing a QoS Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
User Interface Reference for QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Dell Compellent
85
Chapter 4 Import
Setting up an External Device

To import data to a Storage Center you must have the required amount of disk space
classified as an External Device, which can only be done if the disk is unmanaged.
1 In the System Tree, select an unmanaged disk.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Classify Disk as External Device. The Classify Disk
as External Device dialog box appears.
3 Enter a name. You may choose to name this disk to indicate from where the data was
imported.
86
Setting up an External Device
4 Click Classify Now. Upon completion, external devices can be found in the External
Devices folder under the Disks node in System Explorer view.
See Also
Release a Managed Disk on page 200
Dell Compellent
87
Chapter 4 Import
Mapping an External Device to a Server

Map the external device to a server to allow the server to see the external device.
Note: If you map an external device to a server that does not have a Host Bus
Adapter (HBA) available, the server will not detect the external device. When an
HBA is added, the mapped external device will appear at the server.
1 In the System Tree, right-click on an unmapped external device and select Map
External Device to Server from the menu. The Map External Device to Server
wizard starts.
2 Select a server in the list, or if necessary, create a server or cluster.

3 Click Continue. The QoS definition page appears.
4 Select the QoS Definition to use or create a new definition.

5 Click Continue. A summary page appears.
88
Mapping an External Device to a Server
6 Click Map Device Now.

7 To view the mapping details, select the external device in the System Tree, and click the
Mapping tab in the main window.
See Also
Create a New QoS Definition on page 95
Dell Compellent
89
Chapter 4 Import
Importing from an External Device

When you import data, Storage Center uses thin provisioning to migrate data to the
specified volume. The import process can be monitored using the System Manager View
menu or on the Volume properties Import tab until the import is entirely synchronized.
Note: Mappings between the source volume and the original server should be
removed before starting a Thin Import.
1 Right-click on an External Device and select Thin Import from External Device from
the shortcut menu. The Thin Import from External Device wizard starts.
2 Select the type of Thin Import to perform:
Copy: Copies data from the source device to the destination volume. Changes made
to the source during the copy process are copied to the destination volume. Copy
does not dynamically update the destination volume after the copy is complete.
Copy/Migrate: Copies data from the source device to the destination volume. When
complete, the copied data resides on the destination volume, and the destination
volume is mapped to the Storage Center server.
A Warning screen may appear, cautioning you about the space the import process will
occupy.
90
3 Click Continue. The next page displays a list of volumes.
4 In the Volume list, select an existing volume or click Create Volume to create a new
volume. Follow the Create Volume wizard and return to this step.
5 Click Continue. The QoS Definition page appears.
Dell Compellent
91
Chapter 4 Import
6 Select the QoS definition for the import process or click Create QoS Definition if the
required definition does not exist. Follow the Create QoS wizard and return to this step.
7 Click Continue. The final page displays all the selected information for verification.
8 Click Import Now to start the process. During the Import, information about the process
is shown in the Volume Import tab and in the View Import tab.
Note: Importing data from an external device requires the Storage Center to
read all blocks of the entire size of the volume. Depending on RAID selection this
may consume up to two times the storage of the volume on your Storage Center.
Thin import works by not writing data if no previous page exists for the data in
question, and the data being written is all zeros. This saves significant space for
many sparse data sets.
92
Dell Compellent
93
Chapter 4 Import
9 After the Import, System Manager proceeds in different ways depending on whether the
Import was a Copy or a CopyMigrate.
Copy: The Import tab is removed from the Volume properties and the record is
removed from the View Import window.
CopyMigrate: the Import tab remains on the Volume properties page, and the
import Type on the View Import window changes to Mirror to External Device.
10 If data was copied to Storage Center, you can reallocate the disk space by deleting the
External Devices node.
11 If data was migrated to Storage Center, the data is mirrored back to its source. You can
leave it in this state, or if you do not need to retain the connection to the source, delete
the record from the View Import window and reallocate the disks in the External
Devices node.
See Also
94
Creating and Editing a QoS Definition

Importing data requires a Quality of Service (QoS) definition to specify a link speed and the
amount of bandwidth that replications are allowed to use for the data import.
Create a New QoS Definition

The Create Replication QoS Definition wizard steps you through the process for defining
a QoS definition. QoS definitions you create here are displayed as QoS options in the
wizard and also on the properties tab of existing replications.
1 In the System Tree, expand the Remote Systems node.
2 Right click on QoS Definitions and select Create QoS Definition. The Create
Replication QoS Definition wizard starts.
3 In the first page of the wizard, select the Link Speed that most closely represents your
link or select Other to enter the appropriate link speed. This setting defines link
attributes only.
4 Set the Number of Links. If you have more than one link to the remote Storage Center,
enter that number. This adjusts the maximum bandwidth allowed without changing the
communication link settings. This setting distributes link resources.
5 Click Continue. The System Manager asks if you want to perform bandwidth limiting.
Bandwidth limiting incurs additional system overhead and is inherently less bandwidth
efficient. Use bandwidth limiting only in cases where the link is shared with other traffic.
6 For replications to use all bandwidth on the link at all times, click No. If you click No, skip
the remainder of this step.
a To create a bandwidth limit schedule, click Yes.
b Click and drag the mouse pointer down and to the right to select days and hours.
c Select a percentage bandwidth limit. The percentage and hours bandwidth will be
limited are displayed.
7 Click Continue.
8 Enter a Name for the QoS Definition, and (optionally) notes that describe the definition.
9 Click Create Now. The QoS is created.
Dell Compellent
95
Chapter 4 Import
See Also
Set Advanced Options on page 97
Edit QoS Definition Properties

Use the QoS Properties to change settings in the QoS definition.
1 In the System Tree, select a QoS definition.
2 From the QoS shortcut menu, select Properties. The QoS Definition Properties
dialog box appears.
3 On the General tab, change any of the following: QoS name, Type (QoS definition),
Link Speed, Number of Links.
4 (Optional) Click Advanced to change Advanced Chopper Settings.
Note: Advanced Chopper Settings should modified only under the guidance of
Dell Technical Support Services. See the table on page 103 for descriptions of
these settings.
5 (Optional) Click the Notes tab to change or add QoS properties notes.
96
Set Advanced Options

Use Advanced Chopper Settings to adjust IO parameters for specific requirements as
recommended by Dell Technical Support Services.
1 Display the Advanced Chopper Settings for a QoS Definition:
Right-click on an existing QoS definition and select Properties, then click the
Advanced tab:
Create a new QoS definition, and in the first page of Create Replication QoS
Definition wizard.
Note: Advanced Chopper Settings should be modified only under the guidance
of Dell Technical Support Services.
2 Adjust the values as recommended by Dell Technical Support Services.

3 Save the new settings:
If you are editing an existing definition, click OK to save your changes and close the
dialog box.
If you are creating a new QoS definition, click Continue to proceed to the next page
in the wizard.
See Also
Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96
QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab on page 103
Dell Compellent
97
Chapter 4 Import
User Interface Reference for QoS

This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show or modify QoS
information.
QoS General Tab

Selecting a QoS in the System Tree opens the main window with a set of tabs across the
top. Each tab provides information about the volume. The QoS General tab provides an
overview of the selected QoS.
Setting
Description
Name
Name of the QoS definition.
Link Speed
Speed of the QoS link.
IOs Per Second
Number of IO requests completed per second.
KBs Per Second
Amount of data transported per second.
Date Created / Date Updated Date of creation/update and by whom.

Notes
Optional notes about the volume.
See Also
98
QoS Limit Tab

The QoS Limit tab displays the bandwidth limit percent and the time in hours that the limit
is in place.
See Also
Dell Compellent
99
Chapter 4 Import
QoS Advanced Tab

The QoS Advanced Tab displays the current Advanced Chopper Settings.
Setting
Description
Global Maximum Sectors Per IO
Number of sectors to transfer in a single I/O request.
Global Maximum Number of IOs
Total number of outstanding I/O requests allowed.
Global Maximum Number of Sectors
Total number of outstanding sectors allowed.
Destination Maximum Number of IOs
Number of outstanding I/Os allowed per destination.
Destination Maximum Number of

Sectors
Number of outstanding sectors allowed per destination.
Maximum IOs Per Queue Pass
Number of I/Os allowed at each pass through the system

queue.
Maximum Sectors Per Queue Pass
Number of sectors allowed to a destination at each pass

through the system queue.
See Also
QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab on page 103
100
QoS Definition Replications Tab

The Replications tab lists replications that use the selected QoS definition.
Dell Compellent
Field
Description
Replication Name
Name of the replication
Source Volume
Name of the source volume for the replication
Replication State
Up or Down
Remote System
Storage Center to which the replication was made
Percentage Synced
Status of the Asynchronous replication as a percentage
Remaining
Amount of data remaining to be synched
Current Replay
Date and time of current Replay being replicated (or active Replay)
Replicate Active Replay
Whether the active Replay is being replicated
Deduplication
Whether Deduplication is active
Using Live Volume
Whether the replication is using Live Volume
QoS Definition
Name of QoS definition used by the replication
101
Chapter 4 Import
QoS Definition Properties General Tab

The General Properties tab allows you to view and edit QoS Definition properties.
Setting
Description
Name
Name of the QoS definition
Type
QoS Definition
Link Speed
Speed of the QoS link.
Number of Links
Number of links to the remote Storage Center.
See Also
102
QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab

The QoS Properties Advanced Tab allows you to adjust the Advanced Chopper Settings.
Dell Compellent
Setting
Description
Global Maximum Sectors

Per IO
Number of sectors to transfer in a single I/O request. This number

determines the maximum size of an I/O request. Larger values cause
less data "chopping" and larger chunks of data will be sent on the
wire. If this value is set too high, the target side's write cache may be
bypassed.
Global Maximum Number of

IOs
Total number of outstanding I/O requests allowed. This setting is

related to the execution throttle set in the HBA. The iSCSI protocol
limits the number of outstanding requests to 64, so setting this value
any higher will have no effect on iSCSI transports.
Global Maximum Number of

Sectors
Total number of outstanding sectors allowed. This setting determines

the total amount of data on the wire at any given time; if sectors per
I/O multiplied by the number of I/Os is greater than this value,
outstanding I/Os are limited.
Destination Maximum
Number of IOs
Number of outstanding I/Os allowed per destination.
103
Chapter 4 Import
Setting
Description
Destination Maximum
Number of Sectors
Number of outstanding sectors allowed per destination.
Maximum IOs Per Queue

Pass
Number of I/Os allowed at each pass through the system queue. This
setting is relevant on a per destination basis. If there are multiple
volumes to a single destination, outstanding I/Os are serviced from
the first volume, then the second, and so on, until this number is
reached. Smaller values ensure that all volumes to a destination get
serviced often.
Maximum Sectors Per

Queue Pass
Number of sectors allowed to a destination at each pass through the

system queue. Smaller values increase fairness at the expense of
CPU utilization.
See Also
QoS Definition Properties Notes Tab

The QoS Properties Notes Tab allows you to add notes about the QoS Definition.
See Also
104
Servers
This chapter describes how to connect and manage servers in Storage Center.
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Server Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Managing Single Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Managing Server Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Managing Virtual Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Managing Server Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Managing HBAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Using Topology Explorer Server Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
User Interface Reference for Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Dell Compellent
105
Chapter 5 Servers
Introduction
Defining a server enables Storage Center to pass IO through the ports on that server. After
a server is created, volumes can be mapped to it.
Several servers can be combined into a server cluster. The Storage Center views the server
cluster as one server. Volumes can be mapped to the server cluster or to a server that is a
member of the cluster.
One server or server cluster can be the host of one or more virtual servers. Each virtual
server can have a different operating system. The Storage Center views each virtual server
as a separate entity. Volumes mapped to one virtual server are not mapped to other virtual
servers residing on the same server.
Servers can be organized into server folders either to make them easier to manage or as
a means to restrict access to servers.
See Also
Managing Server Clusters on page 115
Create a Virtual Server on page 124
Users and User Groups on page 297
Restrictions for Servers Created by FluidFS

Servers and server clusters created using the FluidFS file system cannot be modified or
deleted using Storage Center System Manager. Therefore, for these server types:
Shortcut menus customarily displayed when right-clicking on a server or server cluster

are disabled.
Context menu commands customarily displayed near the top of the System Explorer
window are disabled.
For information about managing FluidFS servers and server clusters, see your FluidFS
product documentation.
See Also
Server Icons
In the System Tree, the System Manager uses icons to denote the server type.
Icon
Server Type
Server Node all servers
Server Folder
FluidFS Server
Server
106
Server Mapping
Icon
Server Type
Server Cluster
FluidFS Server Cluster
Virtual Server
Server Mapping
Server mapping details are shown in the main window by selecting a server in the System
Tree and clicking the Mapping tab.
Information displayed depends on the server configuration, such as:
Dell Compellent
Server with HBA ports of different transport types (such as Fibre Channel and iSCSI)
Server with multiple server HBA ports
Clustered server
Virtual server
Server whose operating system supports multi-pathing
107
Chapter 5 Servers
View Server Mapping

The server Mapping tab shows the mapping between volumes and servers.
2 Click the Mapping tab. Mapping information appears.
The Mapping tab shows the volumes to which the server is mapped and a mapping grid
that shows additional Mapping Details about the manner in which the volume is
mapped to the server.
Virtual Servers: If the server selected is a virtual server, the Mapping tab displays
which volumes are mapped to the virtual server. Information includes whether the
volume is mapped to the virtual server, the host server of the virtual server, or
mapped to both.
Advanced Mapping Details: You can view advanced mapping details only if your
user volume default settings permit you to do so.
See Also
Set Mapping Volume Defaults on page 324.
View Volumes Mapped to a Server

Use the Volumes tab to see a list of volumes that are connected to a specific server.
1 In the System Tree, select a server. Server information appears.
2 Click the Volumes tab. System Manager displays the volumes that are mapped to this
server, including volume name, type of volume, whether the volume is redundant, the
amount of disk space consumed by the volume, and the logical size of the volume.
View Details about Volumes Mapped to a Server

Use the Mapping tab to display details about volumes that are mapped to the server, server
cluster, or virtual server.
1 In the System Tree, select a server. Server information appears.
2 Click the Mapping tab.
Select a volume to view details about the way that volume is mapped to the server or server
cluster, including cluster node information.
108
Server Mapping
View Volumes Mapped to a Remote System

Use the Mapping tab to display details about volumes that are mapped to a remote system.
If the server selected is a remote system, the Mapping displays the volumes that are
mapped to that remote system. Select a volume to view details about the way that volume
is mapped to the remote system.
View Server Charts

Use the Charts tab to see read and write speeds and IO rates for the card.
2 Click on the Charts tab.
Dell Compellent
The top of the chart displays reads, writes, and total KB per second
The bottom of the chart displays reads, writes, and total IO per second
109
Chapter 5 Servers
Managing Single Servers

Creating a server means to identify it to a Storage Center using the Create Server wizard.
If you are using iSCSI CHAP, add remote CHAP initiators to communicate with the server,
see Add a Remote CHAP Initiator on page 174.
Create a Server
The Create Server wizard guides you through the process of creating a server.
1 In the System Tree, select Servers.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Server. The Create Server wizard starts. The
wizard lists Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) recognized by the Storage Center.
110
Check boxes near the bottom of the page allow you to filter HBA connections
displayed on this page.
Buttons at the bottom of the page allow you to select from various actions:
Button
Actions
Define HBA by IP
This page of the wizard allows you to manually define an HBA port that has
not yet been connected to a Storage Center.
1
Enter the static IP address of the HBA port.
Click Continue.
The HBA is added to the list of available HBAs.

Manually Define HBA
Find HBA
This page of the wizard allows you to manually define an HBA port that has
not yet been connected to a Storage Center.
1
Select the transport type (Fibre Chanel or iSCSI).
Enter a WWN or iSCSI name for the HBA.
Click Continue.
Find HBA helps you find the servers currently on the network or servers to
be added to the network. If your server is already connected to the network
click Yes, if not, click No.
If Yes, unplug your server from the network, wait 30 seconds, and click
Continue.
If No, plug your server into the network, wait 30 seconds, and click
Continue.
If new HBAs are not detected, check the connection between the
server and the controller, and click Scan Again. If new HBAs are still
not detected, there is a problem with your network, HBAs, or fiber
cables.
If new HBAs are detected, the screen will display the message "# Host Bus
Adapters have been detected (where # is a number).
3 Select one or more HBAs.

If you select an iSCSI HBA, you have the option to create the server using WWNs or
iSCSI Qualified Names (IQNs) for HBAs. Default is iSCSI Name.
4 Click Continue. A page allowing you to name the server appears.
5 Enter a name for the server or accept the default.

6 Enter a folder name.
Dell Compellent
111
Chapter 5 Servers

8 From the drop-down menu, select an operating system (OS) for the server. All servers
must have an OS defined. Expand operating system folders to view operating system
versions.
Note: Volumes are mapped to servers according to the rules of the server
operating system.
9 Click Continue. The page displays the name and attributes of the server. Click the
question mark icon. A page is displayed showing rules for the selected operating
system.
10 Click Create Now. On the next page, select from the following options:
Map the server to a Volume
Map a different Server to a Volume
Create Volume
Create Server
11 Click Close to exit the wizard

Note: For a short time after a server is created, it may appear in the System Tree
with an error icon while Storage Center re-evaluates its server connectivity.
When System Manager is refreshed, the error icon disappears when the server
is visible to Storage Center.
112
Rename a Server
Use the Server Properties dialog box to change a server name.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Server Properties dialog box appears
with the General tab selected. This tab shows the server name and operating system.
3 Enter a new name.

4 (Optional) Enter notes on the Info tab.
5 Click OK. The server is renamed.
Change the Operating System of a Server

If an operating system on a server changes because of an operating system upgrade or
operating system capability changes from single path to multi-path, you may need to
change the operating system of the server in Storage Center.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Server Properties dialog box appears
3 Select a new operating system.
4 (Optional) Enter notes on the Info tab.
5 Click OK. The operating system of that server is changed.
Dell Compellent
113
Chapter 5 Servers
Remove Mappings from a Server

You can either select a volume and remove the mapping to the server, or select a server
and remove volumes mapped to it. This command is similar for servers, server clusters,
and virtual servers.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Remove Mappings from a Server. System Manager
displays volumes mapped to that server.
3 Select mappings to remove.
Make sure that the volume mapped to this server is no longer mounted. If you
remove an active map entry, the server using the volume will have read/write errors.
System Manager warns you if you are attempting to remove an active map entry.
Make sure that removing this mapping will not create a gap in the LUN sequence.
Most operating systems require contiguous LUN sequencing starting with LUN 0. A
gap in the LUN sequence may cause the server to fail to recognize subsequent
volumes.
4 Click Remove Now. The mapping is removed.
Delete a Server
Deleting a server returns HBAs connected to that server to the list of available HBAs.
3 Click Yes. The server is deleted. When deleting a server, be aware of the following:
114
Deleting a server cluster deletes all the servers within the cluster.
Deleting a server node within a server cluster deletes only that server node.
Deleting a server that is part of a virtual server deletes only that server.
Managing Server Clusters

A server cluster is a collection of servers. A server that is a member of a server cluster is
referred to as a cluster node. Volumes can be mapped directly to a server cluster. All
volumes mapped to a server cluster are automatically mapped to all nodes in the cluster.
This increases IO efficiency and, if one server fails, IO continues to other servers within the
cluster. Volumes can also be mapped to only one of the nodes within the server cluster.
Some operating systems require that a volume mapped to multiple cluster nodes use the
same LUN on each node. When creating a server cluster, Storage Center attempts to map
an included volume to the same LUN on all cluster servers. If the LUN selected is not
available on a particular server, the mapping is not performed and the volume is only
partially connected to the cluster.
All servers within a server cluster must have the same operating system.
Create a Server Cluster

Use the Create Server Cluster wizard to create a server cluster.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Server Cluster. The Create Server Cluster
wizard starts.
3 Click Add Existing Server. The Select a Server page appears.
Dell Compellent
115
Chapter 5 Servers
4 Expand a server folder to view servers within the folder, if necessary, and select a
server.
5 Click Continue. The original Create Server Cluster page reappears.
6 Add another server by clicking Add Existing Server again. The Create Server Cluster
page reappears with the servers listed under Selected Servers. The page also displays
the operating systems of the selected servers.
Note: All servers in the server cluster must have the same operating system. If
a server is incorrectly selected to be in a cluster, click Remove Selected Server
to remove the server from the list before creating the server cluster.
7 After you have added all the servers to the server cluster, click Continue. A page opens
that allows you to name the server cluster.
8 Name the server cluster or accept the default.
116
10 Click Continue. If volumes were mapped to individual server nodes, System Manager
displays a list of mapped volumes and asks you to select volumes to map to server
cluster. By default, System Manager selects all volumes mapped to the server nodes,
except boot volumes; by default, boot volumes are not selected to be mapped to the
server cluster.
11 Click Continue. System Manager displays volumes mapped to cluster nodes and asks
you to select the volumes you want to map to the cluster.
12 Click Continue. The system asks you to confirm.

13 From the next page, map volumes or click Close. Notice that the server cluster appears
in the System Tree.
Dell Compellent
117
Chapter 5 Servers
14 In the Name field, enter a name or accept the default.

16 Click Continue. System Manager displays a new page showing your server cluster
creation choices.
17 Click Create Now to create the cluster or click Back to make changes.
Create a New Server for a Server Cluster

If a server to be added to the cluster does not exist in Storage Center, you can create it from
within the Create Server Cluster wizard.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Server Cluster. The Create Server Cluster
wizard starts.
3 Click Create New Server and follow the Create Server wizard. When finished, you will
return the Create Server Cluster wizard.
4 Finish the Create Server Cluster wizard.
See Also
Add a Server to Cluster

Use the Add Server to Cluster wizard to add one server or multiple servers to a server
cluster.
1 In the System Tree, select a server that is a not a member of a server cluster. From the
shortcut menu, select Add Server to Cluster. The Add Server to Cluster wizard
starts showing a list of server clusters.
2 Select a server cluster.
4 Click Apply Now. Volumes that were mapped to the server cluster are now mapped to
the server that was added.
118
Remove a Server from Cluster

Use the Remove Servers from Cluster wizard to remove one server or multiple servers
from a server cluster.
Remove a Single Server

Use the Remove Servers from Cluster wizard to delete a server from a cluster.
1 In the System Tree, select a server that is a member of a server cluster. From the
shortcut menu, select Remove Servers from Cluster. The Remove Servers from
Cluster wizard starts.
2 Click Remove Now. Because volumes mapped to the server cluster are mapped to all
servers within the cluster, removing a server from a cluster does not affect volumes
mapped to the cluster.
Remove Multiple Servers

Use the Remove Servers from Cluster wizard to delete multiple servers from a cluster.
1 In the System Tree, select a server cluster.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Remove Servers from Cluster. System Manager
displays a list of servers that are members of this cluster.
3 Select one or more servers to remove. Click Continue. System Manager asks you to
confirm.
4 Click Remove Now.
Dell Compellent
119
Chapter 5 Servers
Convert a Server to a Server Cluster

In Server Clusters created using Storage Center software versions prior to version 5.5, a
server cluster may have been represented by a single server definition containing the
server ports for all nodes in the cluster. In the current version you can define each physical
cluster node individually and then group them into a server cluster. You can then easily map
volumes directly to the cluster to make them visible to each cluster node.
The Convert to Server Cluster wizard guides you through the process of splitting an
existing single server cluster definition into its individual cluster nodes. After cluster nodes
are defined, volume maps will be moved automatically to each node without disrupting
server IO.
1 In the System Tree, select a single server.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Convert to Server Cluster. The Convert to Server
Cluster wizard starts.
Note: If the selected server is already a member of a server cluster, the Convert
to Server Cluster option is not displayed.
3 Click Continue. A list of available server ports and defined cluster nodes is displayed.
4 Click Add Cluster Node to add an additional node to the cluster and select the server
ports for that cluster node. After all available ports have been assigned to a cluster node,
you will be able to proceed with server cluster creation.
5 Enter a name for the cluster node and select all server HBA ports that belong to the
cluster node.
6 Click Add Cluster Node.
After all available ports have been assigned to a cluster node, the wizard displays
information about the cluster nodes to be created and the server HBA ports for each
node.
7 Click Convert Now to complete server cluster creation.
120
Promote Server Cluster Mappings

After a volume has been mapped to a server node, it can be promoted from that server
node to a server cluster.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Promote Mappings to Server Cluster. The Promote
Mappings to Cluster wizard starts.
3 Select the mapping to promote by highlighting it.

4 Click Continue. The resulting page displays the volume selected for promotion and the
name of the server cluster to which it will be mapped.
5 Click Promote Now to promote volume mappings or click Cancel to exit.
Dell Compellent
121
Chapter 5 Servers
Demote Server Cluster Mappings

After a volume has been mapped to a server cluster, it can be demoted from that server
cluster to a server node.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Demote Mappings to Server Cluster Nodes. The
Demote Mappings to Cluster Nodes wizard starts showing current mappings.
3 Select the check boxes of the mappings to be demoted.

4 Click Continue. The next page lists servers in the cluster and the volumes that are
mapped to the servers.
Selected server mappings will be demoted from the cluster to the server. By default,
all server mappings are selected.
Cleared server mappings will be deleted from the server.
5 Click Demote Now to demote volume mappings or click Cancel to exit.
122
Delete a Server Cluster

Before you can delete a server cluster, you must remove or delete all the server nodes
within the server cluster.
1 Make sure all nodes that were part of the cluster are removed or deleted. In the System
Tree, select an empty server cluster.
3 Click Yes to confirm.
Dell Compellent
123
Chapter 5 Servers
Managing Virtual Servers

You can create a new server as a virtual server or you can convert a physical server to a
virtual server.
Create a Virtual Server

Use the Create Virtual Server wizard to select all server HBAs for the new server. There
is no limit on the number of virtual servers you can create on a server.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Virtual Server. A list of available HBAs appears.
3 If you know the HBA(s) for the selected server, select it by clicking the check box to the
left of the HBA(s) name. If not, select either Manually Define HBA or Find HBA and
follow the instructions.
4 After you have selected or defined the HBA(s), click Continue. A page allowing you to
name virtual server appears.
5 Enter a name or accept the default.
6 From the drop-down menu, select an operating system that can act as an OS for a
virtual machine, such as Windows 2008.
9 Click Create Now. The virtual server appears under the host server you selected.
124
Managing Virtual Servers
Convert a Physical Server to a Virtual Server

Use the Create Virtual Server wizard to convert a physical server to a virtual server.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Convert to Virtual Server. System Manager asks you
to select a host server or server cluster for the selected servers.
Note: The destination server or server cluster must be running an operating
system that can act as a virtual server host, such as VMWare ESX or Windows
2008.
3 In the System Tree, select a server or server cluster. Click Continue. A confirmation
page appears.
4 Click Convert Now. The clustered server is converted to a virtual server.
Dell Compellent
125
Chapter 5 Servers
Convert a Virtual Server to a Physical Server

Use the Convert to Physical Server wizard to convert a virtual server to a physical server.
1 In the System Tree, select a virtual server.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Convert to Physical Server. The Convert Virtual
Server to Physical Server wizard starts.
3 Click Convert Now. The other virtual servers remain virtual. Only the server you
converted to a physical server is removed from the virtual server group.
Delete a Virtual Host Server

Follow these step to delete a virtual host server.
1 In the System Tree, select a virtual host server.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager warns you that deleting a
virtual host server also deletes all virtual servers attached to the host.
3 Click Yes. The virtual host server and all virtual servers attached to the host are deleted.
126
Managing Server Folders
Managing Server Folders

Use server folders to organize and to control access to servers. Server folders can be
hierarchical. Folders appear in the System Tree under the servers node.
Create a Server Folder

Use the Create Server Folder wizard to create folders.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Server Folder. The Create Server Folder
wizard starts.
4 (Optional) Enter notes.
5 Click Create Now.
Add Servers to a Server Folder

Use the shortcut menu options to move servers to a folder.
1 In the System Tree, select one or more servers.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Move to Folder. System Manager displays a list of
folders.
3 Select a folder.
5 Click Move Now.
Move Servers to a Different Folder

Use the shortcut menu options to move servers from one folder to another folder.
1 In the System Tree, select a server. From the shortcut menu, select Move to Folder.
The Move Servers wizard starts, displaying server folders.
2 Select a folder to which to move the server.
3 Click Continue. System Manager displays the server and the folder path.
4 Click Move Now.
Dell Compellent
127
Chapter 5 Servers
Managing HBAs
Use these tasks to locate, add, and delete HBAs in the Storage Center.
Find an HBA
The find HBA option requires physical access to the server ports.
1 In the System Tree, select a server. From the shortcut menu, select Add HBAs to
Server. The Add HBAs to Server wizard starts.
2 Click Find HBA. System Manager asks if the server is already cabled to the network.
If you click Yes, System Manager asks you to make sure that the network
acknowledges the HBA.
Locate and unplug the cable to the HBA on the back of the server.
Wait 60 seconds.
Plug the cable going to the HBA back into the server.
Click Find HBA again.
Select an HBA. Click Continue. The system asks you to confirm.
If you click No:
Plug the server into the FC Network or create a connection by logging on to the
iSCSI portal.
Wait 30 seconds
Click Continue.
Note: If Storage Center does not recognize the new HBA, check the cabling and
connections and click Scan Again.
128
Managing HBAs
Add HBAs to a Server from a List

If you add a new card to a server, you can logically identify it to the Storage Center using
the Add HBAs to Server wizard.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Add HBAs to Server. The Add HBAs to Server wizard
starts. In the Connected Controller Ports column, System Manager lists the server
ports connected to this controller.
3 Select the HBAs you want to display: FC, iSCSI, or only Up connections.
Note: When you click Refresh, System Manager does not scan for new HBAs;
it merely re-displays the current list of HBAs.
4 Select an HBA.
Note: If you select an iSCSI HBA, you have the option to create the server using
WWNs or iSCSI Qualified Names (IQNs) for HBAs. Default is iSCSI Qualified
Name.
6 Click Modify Now.
Dell Compellent
129
Chapter 5 Servers
Manually Define an HBA

Use the Add HBA to Server wizard to define an HBA that does not appear in the list.
1 In the System Tree, select a server. From the shortcut menu, select Add HBAs to
Server.
2 In the Add HBA to Server wizard, click Manually Define HBA. The Add HBAs to
Server page appears.
3 Select a Transport Type and enter a World Wide Name or iSCSI name for the HBA.
4 Click Continue. The HBA you entered is shown in the list of HBAs.
5 Select the HBA you defined.
6 Click Continue. A summary page appears.
7 Click Modify Now. The HBA is added to the server.
130
Managing HBAs
Remove HBAs from a Server

Before removing an HBA, make sure that no volumes are mounted to this server through
this HBA. If you remove an active HBA, the server that is using the volume no longer has
access to that volume and will receive read or write errors. When you map a volume to a
server, you are really mapping that volume to one (or possibly more than one) of the server
HBAs. When you remove an HBA to which a volume is mapped, the maps are also deleted.
Note: When an HBA is removed from a server, any mapping through those HBA
ports will be automatically reevaluated and moved to other HBA ports on the server
if any are available.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Remove HBAs from Server. System Manager displays
the HBAs on that server.
3 Select an HBA.
5 Click Remove HBAs Now. The HBA is removed.
Delete an HBA
Follow these steps to delete an HBA from the System Tree.
2 Click the Server HBAs tab.
3 Right-click on a server port and select Remove HBA. System Manager asks you to
confirm.
4 Click Remove HBA Now.
Dell Compellent
131
Chapter 5 Servers
View a Server Connectivity Report

The Server Connectivity report, available in the View menu, shows server port information,
including WWN and fault domain.
Note: A Server Connectivity Report appears only if the Storage Center does not
have Virtual Ports.
1 From the View menu, select Server Connectivity. The server connectivity information
appears. The left side lists:
WorldWide Name (WWN)
Name of server
Type of server
Port type of FC or iSCSI
2 Scroll to the right to view additional information for each server.
132
Using Topology Explorer Server Functions
Using Topology Explorer Server Functions

Use Topology Explorer to map volumes to servers and external (remote) Storage Centers
easily by dragging components. The Topology Explorer is divided into three columns. The
left column displays servers. The middle column displays volumes, and the right column
displays external (remote) Storage Centers.
From the View menu, select Topology Explorer.
The Connections button, located above the right column, toggles between showing all
connections and showing connections only for selected objects. Numbers that appear
on the connection lines between servers and volumes indicate the logical unit for the
mapping. If there are Replications, there will also be connection lines between volumes
and the remote volumes to which they are Replicating.
The Folders button, located to the right of the Connections button, toggles between
showing and hiding volume folders. When the Folders button is toggled to show folders,
a red line is drawn through the Folders button and unmapped folders are displayed.
When the Topology Explorer displays folders, two additional command objects appear
at the bottom of the window: Create New Server Folder and Create New Volume
Folder.
The following two server functions are available through Topology Explorer command
objects:
Create New Server object starts the Create Server wizard.
Create New Server Folder starts the Create Server Folder wizard.
See Also
Using the Topology Explorer on page 45
Dell Compellent
133
Chapter 5 Servers
Create a New Server with the Topology Explorer

Use the mouse to drag and drop a server into a Storage Center network.
1 Drag the New Server command object to the Topology Explorer. The Create Server
wizard starts.
2 Follow the instructions described on Managing Single Servers on page 110.
Create a New Server Folder with the Topology Explorer

Use the mouse to drag and drop a server folder
1 Make sure the Show Folders toggle is enabled and the Show Folder command object
appears.
2 Drag the New Server Folder command object to the Topology Explorer. The Create
New Server Folder wizard starts.
3 Follow the instructions described in Create a Server Folder on page 127.
134
User Interface Reference for Servers

This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show server
information.
Server Information General Tab

System Manager displays general and detailed information about each server connected
to Storage Center in the General tab.
Field
Description
Name
Name of server, applied when server was created.
Index
Number used by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with

object identification.
Folder
If the server is organized into a folder, the folder in which it resides.
Type
Server, virtual server, or server cluster.
Operating System
Operating system of the server.
Connectivity
Connection status of the server.
Date
Date server was created/updated and by whom.
Notes
Optional notes, frequently blank.
See Also
Rename a Server on page 113
Dell Compellent
135
Chapter 5 Servers
Server HBAs Tab

The Server HBA tab displays information about the HBAs used to communicate between
the server and the Storage Center.
Field
Description
Type
May be FC or iSCSI.
Server Port
IQN or WWN for iSCSI and WWN for FC.
Status
Status of the server port.
Connectivity
Connection status of the server port.
Port Information
Port ID, node name, and other identifying information.
Connected Controller Ports
Address of connected controller ports.
See Also
Find an HBA on page 128
Add HBAs to a Server from a List on page 129
Manually Define an HBA on page 130
Remove HBAs from a Server on page 131
Delete an HBA on page 131
136
Server Connectivity Tab

The server Connectivity tab displays information about individual HBAs connected to the
Storage Center across controller ports and fault domains.
Note: The preceding figure shows sample connectivity information for Fibre
Channel. For iSCSI, this pane also displays the IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway.
The upper portion of the pane shows information about the Server HBA.
Field
Description
Controller Port
IQN or WWN for iSCSI and WWN for FC.
Status
Status of the server port.
Controller
Controller name associated with the port.
Type
Virtual Port or Physical port.
See Also
Find an HBA on page 128
Add HBAs to a Server from a List on page 129
Remove HBAs from a Server on page 131
Dell Compellent
137
Chapter 5 Servers
Server Mapping Tab

The server Mapping tab lists the volumes to which it is mapped and shows the mapping
details.
Information displayed depends on the server configuration, but typically covers these fields.
Field
Description
Volume
Name of the volume to which the server is mapped.
Status
Indicates whether the link is Up or Down.
Type
Transport type: FC or iSCSI.
Server
Name of the server to which the volume is mapped.
Server Port
WWN of the server port to which the volume is mapped.
Controller Port
WWN of the controller port to which the volume is mapped.
LUN
Logical unit number assigned (if applicable).
Read Only
Indicates whether the advanced option is set to make the volume

Read Only.
See Also
Map a Volume to Remote System on page 26
Remove Mappings from a Server on page 114
138
Server Volumes Tab

The server Volumes tab shows information about the volumes mapped to the server.
Field
Description
Name
Name of the volume.
Volume Type
May be one of the following:
Active: Volume for which no Replays have been taken.
Replay Enabled: Volume for which a Replay has been taken.
Storage Type
Default is 2 MB Redundant.
Disk Folder
Folder the volume uses for storage (if any).
Consumed Disk Space
Amount of disk space used.
Logical Size
Size of the volume.
Mapped Via
Mapping path.
See Also
View Volumes Mapped to a Server on page 108
Remove Mappings from a Server on page 114
Dell Compellent
139
Chapter 5 Servers
Server Charts Tab

The server Charts tab displays Read and Write performance for the sever. The results are
shown for the most current 1 hour period.
See Also
View Server Charts on page 109
140
Controllers
The Dell Compellent controller provides central processing for the Storage Center and also
manages RAID storage. Storage Center can be configured with either single- or dualcontrollers with Fibre Channel, iSCSI, and SAS interconnects. Dual-controllers provide
automatic failover.
Contents
Setting Controller Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Viewing Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
About Controller Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
About Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
About VLAN Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Viewing SAS Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Managing IO Card Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Rebalancing Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
User Interface Reference for Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Dell Compellent
141
Chapter 6 Controllers
Setting Controller Properties

The Controller Properties dialog box displays information about a controller.
Change the Controller Name

Use the Controller Properties General tab to change the controller name.
1 In the System Tree, select a controller.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. Controller properties information appears
3 Enter the controller name in the
box.
4 Click OK to confirm any changes.
Set Controller IP Properties

The Controller IP addresses for internal communications are established during system
setup and rarely need to be changed. You may change the Management IP (Ether 0), and
you must do so if you are using IPv6.
Caution: Do not change any IPv4 properties in the Controller Properties dialog
box without the guidance of a Dell Technical Support Services. Changing IP
properties can result in the loss of data.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. Controller properties information appears.
3 Click the IP tab.
4 Change the Ether 0 (MGMT) Interface IP as needed.
5 If you are using IPv6 addresses, make sure to enter the IPv6 Prefix Length.
6 Click OK to confirm any changes.
Add Controller Notes

The Controller Properties Info tab provide general controller information.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. Controller properties information appears.
3 Click the Info tab to view information about controller creation and updates.
142
Viewing Controller Status

From the Controllers node on the System Tree you can view controller hardware status.
1 In the System Tree, expand a Controller node.
2 From the list, select a component to display information about the component.
Fans
For each of the blowers in the fan module, displays fan status and current rpm. The
rpm gauge displays fan zones. The Storage Center should operate in the green
zone. If it is not operating in green zone, adjust the ambient temperature. The display
shows the normal minimum and maximum rpms, and upper and lower critical and
warning rpms.
Power Supplies
Displays the power supply name, if it is present, if there is a failure, and if the AC is
lost.
Temps
Displays temperature sensor properties including position of the sensor, status, and
current temp. The temperature gauge displays temperature zones. The Storage
Center should operate in the green zone. The display shows the normal minimum
and maximum temp, and upper and lower critical and warning temperatures.
Voltage
Displays voltage properties including position of the sensor, status, and current
voltage. The voltage gauge displays voltage zones. The Storage Center should
operate in the green zone. The display shows the normal minimum and maximum
voltage, and upper and lower critical and warning voltage.
Cache Card
Displays information about the card including the cache card model, cache size,
firmware version, in service date, and status. Cache card information may be
required by Dell Technical Support Services.
Dell Compellent
143
View Controller Information

When you select the Controller node in the System Tree, System Manager displays a list
of controllers in the Storage Center with basic information about each one.
1 In the System Tree, select Controllers. System Manager displays a list of controllers.
2 Click on a specific controller. System Manager displays information for the individual
controller.
144
View Controller Performance Information

System Manager displays CPU and memory statistics for the most current one-hour period.
1 In the System Tree, expand the Controllers node.
2 Click on a specific controller.
3 In the main window, click the CPU Performance tab. System Manager displays CPU
performance and memory usage as a percentage of total capability used.
View the Back of a Controller

System Manager can display the back view of the controller, showing HBA, port, and power
supply locations.
2 Click on a specific controller.
3 In the main window, click the Back tab.
4 View more information and options using these methods:
Hover the cursor over an object to view more information.
Right-click an object to display additional options.

Note: IO port location varies by controller type.
Dell Compellent
145
About Controller Virtual Ports

Virtual ports change IO ports from a physical to a virtualized representation. This eliminates
the need to reserve ports in case of a failure. In a virtual environment all ports are primary
and can read and write IO. If a port fails, any port within the fault domain takes over for the
failed port. After enabled, virtual ports are displayed in the System Tree under the IO card
to which they belong.
2 Expand the node for a specific controller.
3 Expand the nodes for IO Cards Card Type Specific Card.
4 Select a specific port.
FC and iSCSI: System Manager displays a virtual port for each physical port. For
physical ports, the physical identity, speed, and hardware are given. For virtual ports,
the current and preferred physical port are shown.
iSCSI only: System Manager creates a control port for each iSCSI fault domain
(usually there is only one). In a dual-controller configuration, the control port appears
on only one controller, even though it controls all the iSCSI cards within that domain.
Note: Although you can have more than one fault domain for each transport type
(such as iSCSI or FC), redundancy is best achieved by creating one fault domain for
each transport type.
146
Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports

System Manager provides IO card and port information such as type, location, and status.
Use these tasks to view information about Fibre Channel cards and ports.
View FC Card Information

When you select the FC node in the System Tree, System Manager displays a list of FC
cards in the controller. When you select a specific IO card, System Manager displays
details about the selected card.
1 In the System Tree, expand a Controller node.
2 Click on FC. The window displays status and other information about each Fibre
Channel IO Card installed in the controller.
3 Select a specific FC card. The window displays detailed information about the selected
IO card.
Dell Compellent
Field
Description
Name
Name of IO card.
World Wide Name (WWN)
Unique identifier for the item.
Type
IO card type may be FC or iSCSI.
Description
IO card vendor information.
Status
Status of port may be Up, Down, or Reserved.
147
148
Field
Description
Speed
IO transport speed.
Fault Domain
For front-end ports, shows fault domain. For back-end ports, this
is blank.
Purpose
Network connection Front End, Back End, or Unknown.
Usage
Legacy ports only: For front-end ports, shows whether it is a

primary or reserved port. If it is a back-end port, indicates if it is in
use.
Preferred Controller
Legacy ports only: When ports are rebalanced, choose a

preferred controller.
NPIV Mode
Indicates whether NPIV Mode is turned on to allow FC virtual

ports. When converting an FC port to Virtual Mode, NPIV must be
enabled on the attached switch.
Initiator Count
Number of front-end connections.
Target Count
Number of active disk drives in the Storage Center.
Both Count
Total of front-end devices and back-end disk drives.
Map Count
Number of mapped volumes.
View FC IO Port General Information

System Manager displays port names, domains, and other information in the General tab
of the main window.
1 In the System Tree, expand a Controller node and IO Cards node.
2 Click on FC.
3 Expand a specific FC card.
4 Select a specific port on the FC card. The window displays detailed information about
the selected IO port.
Dell Compellent
149
View FC IO Card Connectivity

System Manager displays IO Card and port information such as WWN, slot and port
locations, and node names. The Connectivity view is the same for FC cards with or without
virtual ports enabled.
2 Expand the FC node.
3 Select a specific FC card.
4 Select the Connectivity tab. The window displays FC IO card connectivity information.
Set the Update Frequency for FC Card Status

Use the options below the tabs to change how and when System Manager updates the
view.
1 In the System Tree, select an FC card.
2 Click the Connectivity tab.
3 Click Set Update Frequency.
4 Choose one of the following: Off, 5 Seconds, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 5 Minutes.
150
View FC IO Card Hardware Information

Use the Hardware tab to view the card location within the controller.
4 Click the Hardware tab. The FC IO card hardware status information appears.
Dell Compellent
The port location is identified.
Mousing over the card displays the name and type.
Right-clicking over the card displays the shortcut menu, from which you can view IO
Card properties.
151
View FC IO Card Performance Charts

Use the Charts tab to see read and write speeds and IO rates for the card.
4 Click Charts. The FC IO Card charts appears.
For each FC IO card, System Manager displays:
152
KBs per second for Reads and Writes and Total KBs per second
IO rate per second for Reads and Writes and Total IO per second
Set FC IO Card User Alias

Use the Properties dialog box to change the User Alias name.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Properties dialog box appears:
3 Enter a user alias (port name).

4 Click OK. The new name appears in the System Tree.
Reset IO Card User Alias

Use the Properties dialog box to reset the User Alias name.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties.
3 Click Reset User Alias.
4 Click OK.
Set NPIV Mode

Use the Properties dialog box to change the NPIV mode.
3 Click the Use NPIV Mode checkbox.
This checkbox indicates whether NPIV Mode is turned on to allow FC virtual ports.
When converting an FC port to Virtual Mode, NPIV must be enabled on the attached
switch.
4 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
153
Change Preferred Physical Port

Use the Properties dialog box to change the preferred physical port for the FC virtual port.
1 In the System Tree select a FC virtual port.
3 In the Properties dialog box, select the Preferred Physical Port from the drop-down
menu.
4 Click OK.
154
Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports

Use these tasks to view information about iSCSI cards and ports.
View iSCSI Card Information

When you select the iSCSI node in the System Tree, System Manager displays a list of
iSCSI cards in the controller. When you select a specific IO card, System Manager displays
1 In the System Tree, expand Controllers and IO Cards.
2 Click on iSCSI. The window displays status and other information about all iSCSI IO
Cards installed in the controller.
For virtual ports, a control port was created during virtual port setup for each iSCSI fault
domain. The control port resides in the System Tree within the iSCSI folder. In a dualcontroller configuration, the control port can reside within the iSCSI folder of either
controller. All iSCSI ports on both controllers in the same fault domain use the same
control port. Traffic is redirected to the appropriate virtual port.
Dell Compellent
155
3 In the System Tree, select a specific iSCSI card. The window displays detailed
information about the selected IO card. For virtual ports, Hardware-related tab options
are omitted, since the port is not reliant on a specific IO card.
Legacy Mode View
Virtual Port Mode View

Physical Port
156
Virtual Port
View iSCSI Control Port Information

System Manager communicates to iSCSI ports through the control port address, and all
traffic is redirected from the control port to the appropriate virtual port.
1 Click on iSCSI.
2 Select a specific iSCSI card.
3 Select a control port.
You cannot change information in this view, but you can select and copy it into other
windows.
The port number is the TCP port number. The default iSCSI port number is 3260 but
it can be changed if there is a special requirement to use different TCP port number.
See Also
Change the iSCSI Card Port Number on page 162
About VLAN Tagging on page 164
Dell Compellent
157
View Advanced iSCSI Card Information

Information and tabs displayed vary depending on whether you have remote connections
set up using Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP). For information about
CHAP, see Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP on page 174.
1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. System Manager displays general iSCSI
card information.
2 Click the Advanced tab. The iSCSI advanced card information appears.
158
Field
Description
Port Number
TCP port number.
Enable Data Digest
An iSCSI data digest enables a digest (32 bit CRC) on all iSCSI
data Protocol Data Units (PDUs) may be Yes or No.
Enable Header Digest
Shows if enabled may be Yes or No.
Enable Immediate Write

Data
Window Size
Size of window may be from 32 to 2048 KB.
Keep Alive Timeout
May be from 5 seconds to 18 hours.
SCSI Command Data

Timeout
May be from 5 second to 18 hours.
Default Time to Wait
May be from 1 second to 10 minutes.
Default Time to Retain
May be from 1 second to 10 minutes.
CHAP Authentication
CHAP Name
CHAP name if enabled.
CHAP Secret
CHAP secret if enabled.
View iSCSI IO Card Connectivity

Use the Connectivity tab to display IO card and port information such as WWN, port and
IP address.
1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card.
2 Click the Connectivity tab. System Manager displays iSCSI card connectivity, if any.
Note: Information and tabs displayed vary depending on whether you have
remote connections set up using CHAP. For information about CHAP, see
Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP on page 174.
View iSCSI Hardware Information

Use the Hardware tab to display specific card information and shows the card location
within the controller.
2 Click the Hardware tab.
Dell Compellent
The port location is highlighted.
Mousing over the port displays port name and type.
Right-click to open the shortcut menu, from which you can view Properties and
status.
159
View iSCSI Performance Charts

Use the Charts tab to see read and write speeds and IO rates for the card. If virtual ports
are enabled, performance charts include a drop-down menu from which to select a port to
view.
2 Click the Charts tab.
Legacy Mode View
Virtual Port Mode View
160
Change an iSCSI Control Port Fault Domain

1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI control port.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Edit Fault Domain.
3 Edit or change the fault domain.
Change iSCSI Control Port IP Settings

1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI control port.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Edit Fault Domain.
3 Select the IP Settings tab.
4 Change the IP Address, Net Mask, or Gateway.
Change the iSCSI Card User Alias

Use the Properties dialog box to change the User Alias name.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The dialog box opens with the General tab
selected.
3 Enter a user alias (port name).

4 Click OK. The new name appears in the System Tree.
Dell Compellent
161
Reset IO Card User Alias

Use the Properties dialog box to reset the User Alias name.
3 Click Reset User Alias.
4 Click OK.
Change the IP Address

Use the Properties dialog box to change the iSCSI card IP address.
3 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway IP Address for the card.
4 Click OK.
Change the iSCSI Card Port Number

The default iSCSI port number is 3260 but you can change it if there is a special
requirement to use a different TCP port number. Use the Advanced tab of Properties
dialog box to change the iSCSI port number.
4 Enter the new TCP Port Number.

5 Click OK.
162
Change Digest Settings

Use the Advanced tab of Properties dialog box to change iSCSI digest settings.
4 Check or clear the options as needed:
Enable Data Digest: Check to enable data digest processing. An iSCSI data digest
enables a digest (32 bit CRC) on all iSCSI data Protocol Data Units (PDUs). Default
is off.
Enable Header Digest: Check to enable header processing. Default is off.
Enable Immediate Data Write: Check to enable data to be included as part of the
write command PDU. Default is off.
5 Click OK.
Change Window Size

Use the Advanced tab of Properties dialog box to change iSCSI data window size.
4 Enter a window size between 16 Kb and 32 Mb. The window size must be divisible by
16 Kb.
5 Click OK.
Change Timeout Duration

Use the Advanced tab of Properties dialog box to change timeout values.
4 Set the timeout values as needed:
Dell Compellent
Keep Alive Data Timeout: Duration between two keep-alive data transmissions in
idle condition. May be between 5 seconds and 18 hours.
SCSI Command Data Timeout: Timeout period after which the SCSI controller,
upon detecting that a command has not received a response, will timeout. May be
between 5 seconds and 18 hours.
Default Time to Wait: May be from 1 second to 10 minutes.
Default Time to Retain: May be from 1 second to 10 minutes.
163
About Jumbo Frames

Note: Not all cards support jumbo frames.
Enabling jumbo frames in the Storage Center controller can enhance network throughput
and reduce use of the CPU. A jumbo frame is 9000 bytes compared to normal size of 1500
bytes. Throughput for large file transfers, such as large multimedia or data files, is
increased by enabling larger payloads in each packet.
Larger payloads create more efficient throughput and require fewer packets to be sent.
Environments with iSCSI servers running software initiators using standard or smarter NICs
receive the biggest benefit from jumbo frames. Enabling jumbo frames can speed up iSCSI
performance by about 5 percent, while reducing server CPU utilization by two percent to
three percent.
Jumbo frames are recommended only for LAN environments. Because TOE (TCP off-load
engine) cards and HBAs already do off-loading, CPU savings from jumbo frames is
minimal.
Enabling Jumbo Frames

Use the General tab of Properties dialog box to change the Frame size.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. IO card properties information appears.
3 Set the Maximum Transmission Unit to 9000.
4 Click OK.
See Also
Jumbo Frames and Flow Control on page 346
About VLAN Tagging

Note: Not all cards support VLAN tagging. For VLAN setting recommendations, see
Other iSCSI Settings on page 347.
A virtual local area network (VLAN) is configured on the system switch. A VLAN consists of
a network of computers that behave as if connected to the same wire even though they
may be physically connected to different segments of a LAN.
System Manager does not know or need to know how VLAN membership is configured on
a switch. The Storage Center iSCSI I/O port is an end station to the VLAN. VLAN can be
enabled or disabled on an iSCSI port. The default is disabled. VLANs:
164
Increase the number of broadcast domains but reduce the size of each broadcast
domain, which in turn reduces network traffic and increases network security (both of
which are hampered in cases of single large broadcast domains).
Reduce management effort to create subnetworks.
Reduce hardware requirement, as networks can be logically instead of physically

separated.
Increase control over multiple traffic types.
About VLAN Tagging
Each Storage Center iSCSI I/O card can be configured with VLAN identifier (VID). When a
VID is configured, Storage Center becomes an end station in the VLAN.
When VLAN tagging is enabled, all outbound Ethernet frames are tagged. When VLAN
tagging is not enabled, all outbound Ethernet frames are untagged. If the card is plugged
into a switch that has been configured with a VLAN, the switch inserts the VID into the
untagged Ethernet frame. When VLAN tagging is enabled, all inbound Ethernet frames
must be tagged and the VID must match the configured VID for that interface. If the inbound
Ethernet frame does not match the configured VID, the frame is discarded. Discarding
frames is called VLAN filtering. When VLAN tagging is disabled, the inbound Ethernet
frame must be untagged; otherwise Ethernet frame is discarded.
Enable VLAN Tagging

2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The IO Card Properties dialog box
appears.
3 Select Enable VLAN Tagging.
4 Enter a VLAN ID (VID) to match the configured VID on the switch, from 1 to 4095.
5 Enter a user priority number. In the event of congestion, this gives a priority to the VLAN.
Zero is the lowest priority and seven is the highest.
6 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
165
Viewing SAS Cards

Use these tasks to view information about SAS cards and ports.
View SAS IO Card Information

When you select the SAS node in the System Tree, System Manager displays a list of SAS
cards in the controller. When you select a specific IO card, System Manager displays
2 Click on SAS. The window displays status and other information about SAS IO cards
installed in the controller.
3 Select a specific SAS card. The window displays detailed information about the selected
IO card.
166
Viewing SAS Cards
View SAS IO Card Connectivity Status

Use the Connectivity tab to display SAS card and port information such as WWN, Status,
Role, and Port ID.
2 Click on SAS.
3 Click the Connectivity tab. SAS IO card connectivity information appears.
Dell Compellent
167
View SAS Port Properties

Select a port to view the port properties in the General tab.
1 In the System Tree, expand Controllers, IO Cards, and SAS nodes.
2 Select a specific SAS card.
3 Select a specific SAS port.
4 Select the General tab.
168
Viewing SAS Cards
View SAS Port Location

Use the Hardware tab to view port locations on the controller.
1 In the System Tree, expand Controllers, IO Cards, and SAS nodes.
2 Select a specific SAS card.
3 Select a specific SAS port.
4 Select the Hardware tab. The port location is highlighted.
Mouse over the port to display port name and type.
Right-click to open the shortcut menu, from which you can view Properties and
status.
Field
Description
Description
Description of the port.
Revision
Revision of the hardware.
Firmware Version
Version of the hardware firmware.
Device Name
Name of device, such as PCIDEV.
Slot Type
Name of slot, such as PCI-E.
Slot
Number of slot from left (6) to right (1).
Slot Port
Number of slot port from top (1) to bottom (4).
SFP Data
Data sent by Small Form-factor Pluggables (SFPs). SFPs allow

network operators to connect different interface types to the
same network equipment using an SFP port.
View SAS IO Card Performance Charts

Use the Charts tab to read and write speeds and IO rates for the card.
1 In the System Tree, select a SAS port.
2 Select the Chart tab. The SAS chart appears.
Dell Compellent
169
Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection

After a local (source) Storage Center is connected to a remote (target) Storage Center and
the remote Storage Center is connected back to the local Storage Center, you can replicate
volumes. All replications are managed using Enterprise Manager.
Remote Fibre Channel Connections: Storage Center automatically detects a Storage

Center system connected through Fibre Channel (FC). After being recognized, remote
FC systems appear in the System Tree.
Remote iSCSI Connections: iSCSI facilitates data transfers over IP networks. Unlike
FC, which requires special-purpose cabling, iSCSI can be run over long distances using
an existing IP network infrastructure.
A Remote Storage Center connects an iSCSI port on one Storage Center to an iSCSI
port on another Storage Center.
Add a Remote Storage Center to iSCSI Ports

Use the Storage Management menu to add a remote Storage Center to a local Storage
Center.
From the Storage Management menu, select, SystemSetup Add iSCSI Remote
Compellent Connections menu or you can use the shortcut menu as described in the
following steps.
1 Select an iSCSI folder. In a dual-controller configuration, it does not matter which of the
two folders you select. Connecting the remote Storage Center to the cards in one
controller connects the remote Storage Center to all cards on both controllers.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections.
170
If the local Storage Center has CHAP enabled, the configure CHAP wizard starts. If
you are using CHAP, see Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP on
page 174.
If the local Storage Center is not using CHAP, the Add iSCSI Remote Compellent
Connections page appears asking if NAT is configured.
Note: NAT is not available in configurations using virtual ports, so if either the
local or remote Storage Center is using virtual ports, NAT is not enabled.
If NAT is enabled, go to Step 3.
If NAT is not enabled, go to Step 4.
3 If NAT is enabled:
a Click Yes NAT.
b Enter the NAT IP addresses and iSCSI names for the remote Compellent iSCSI
cards.
c Click Continue. The link speed page appears. Continue with Step Step 7.
4 If NAT is not enabled, click No NAT. The next page appears.
5 Add the remote addresses:
If the remote Storage Center is using iSCSI virtual ports, add the IP addresses of
the control port.
If the remote Storage Center is not using iSCSI virtual ports, add the IP addresses
of each IO card.
6 Click Continue. The link speed page appears.

7 Enter the speed of the network link between this Storage Center and the remote Storage
Center: T1, T3/100 MB, Gigabit, or greater.
8 Click Continue or Advanced. The Advanced Options page appears.
Dell Compellent
171
9 Keep or change any of the following:
Port number
Enable or disable data digest
Enable or disable header digest
Enable or disable immediate data
Select a window size, from 16KB to 2048 KB
Select a keep alive time-out, from 3 seconds to 18 hours
Select a SCSI command data time-out, from 3 seconds to 18 hours
10 Click Continue. If the Link Speed page reappears. Click Continue again. The Add
Remote System confirmation page appears.
11 Click Add Now. The local Storage Center now recognizes the remote system. But
before the Remote System configuration is complete, you must log into the remote
Storage Center and identify the local Storage Center.
12 To identify the local Storage Center to the remote Storage Center:
a Log into the remote Storage Center.
b Repeat the steps described in Add a Remote Storage Center to iSCSI Ports on
page 170.
View Remote iSCSI Connections

Follow these tasks to view remote iSCSI connection information in System Manager. The
exact information displayed depends on whether Storage Center uses Virtual Port mode or
Legacy Port mode.
2 Click the Remote Compellent Connections tab. Remote Compellent iSCSI
Connections information appears.
172
Change Advanced Remote Connection Properties

Follow these tasks to configure remote connection properties.
2 Click the Remote Compellent Connections tab.
4 Click Advanced. The Advanced Remote Compellent Connection Properties page
appears.
5 Change any of the following:
Port number.
Enable or disable data digest.
Enable or disable header digest.
Enable or disable immediate data.
Select a window size, from 16KB to 2048 KB.
Select a keep alive time-out, from 3 minutes to 18 hours.
Select a SCSI command data time-out, from 3 seconds to 18 hours.
6 Click OK.
Delete iSCSI Remote Connections

Follow these tasks to remove iSCSI remote connections in the Storage Center.
3 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. The Delete iSCSI Remote Connection page
appears.
4 Select delete from all IO cards or just the selected IO card.
5 Click Yes. Connection is deleted.
Dell Compellent
173
Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP

Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is an iSCSI security option that
provides connection authentication based on secrets (essentially passwords) that are
exchanged when a connection is established.
After enabling CHAP on each Storage Center, subsequent steps depend on whether
Storage Center(s) are using Legacy Port Mode or Virtual Port Mode. Steps may include
some or all of the following:
Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Legacy Port Mode) on

page 176.
Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Legacy Port Mode) on page 178.
Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Virtual Port Mode) on page 178
Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Virtual Port Mode) on page 179
Note: Bi-directional (mutual) CHAP is supported only in Legacy Port mode. It is not
supported between Storage Centers using virtual ports.
Display Remote CHAP Initiators

Before configuring new CHAP initiators, you can view existing remote CHAP initiators.
1 In the System Tree, select a control port or an iSCSI IO port.
In Virtual Port Mode, CHAP is enabled in the Properties of the control port.
In Legacy Port Mode, CHAP is enabled in the Properties of each iSCSI IO port.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. Property information appears displaying the
Remote CHAP Initiator tab. This tab displays information about existing CHAP
initiators.
Add a Remote CHAP Initiator

Follow these tasks to add a remote CHAP initiator to Storage Center. The only difference
between adding a remote CHAP initiator and a remote Storage Center CHAP initiator is that
Storage Center enters the first part of the Compellent IQN name in the remote Compellent
initiator page.
1 In the System Tree, select the iSCSI node.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Add Remote CHAP Initiators.
3 Enter the CHAP Name and CHAP Secret of the remote CHAP initiator to be added to
the control port or IO card.
Note: Server CHAP Secret is required only if using bi-directional authentication.
Bi-directional authentication is only supported in Legacy Port mode.
4 Click Add Now. The remote CHAP initiator is added.
Enable CHAP
Follow these tasks to enable CHAP in the Storage Center.
1 In the System Tree, select a port.
In Virtual Port Mode, select the iSCSI control port.
In Legacy Port Mode, select an iSCSI card.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. IO card property information appears.
174
3 Click the CHAP tab. The IO Card Properties dialog box appears.
System Manager supplies the CHAP Name, which is an iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN).
For local (non-remote) Compellent connections, you cannot change this name.
In Legacy Port Mode, CHAP Name is the IQN name of the selected physical port.
In Virtual Port Mode, CHAP Name is the IQN name of the selected control port.
4 Check CHAP Authentication. The CHAP Secret field is no longer grayed out.
5 For bi-directional authentication, enter a 12-character alphanumeric secret (similar to a
password) in the CHAP Secret field.
Note: If you are using a QLogic QLA4010, Storage Center requires a CHAP
Secret. If you leave CHAP Secret blank when configuring a QLA4010 card,
System Manager asks you to enter a CHAP Secret.
6 Click OK. System Manager warns you that saving these changes will disrupt iSCSI
traffic.
7 Click Save Changes to save your changes. Or, click Cancel to abandon your changes.
Dell Compellent
175
Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections

(Legacy Port Mode)
If you add an iSCSI remote connection or remote Compellent CHAP initiator from an iSCSI
folder, the connection or initiator is added for all ports. If you select an individual card (in
Legacy Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port.
1 Log on to the Storage Center on which you enabled CHAP.
2 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI node.
Note: In a dual-controller configuration, it does not matter which of the two iSCSI
folders you select. Connecting the remote Storage Center to cards in one
controller connects remote Storage Center to all cards on both controllers.
3 From the shortcut menu, select Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections. The
Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections to IO Card wizard starts.
176
4 Enter the IP Address and iSCSI Name of the remote Compellent iSCSI port.
Note: IP addresses are displayed in the iSCSI folder of the remote Storage
Center. You can copy an iSCSI name from the iSCSI Name field of the remote
Compellent iSCSI port.
5 Click Continue. The next page of the wizard is displayed.
6 Enter the CHAP Name and specify a Target Secret for the remote Compellent iSCSI
port.
Note: The Remote Target Secret must be at least 12 alphanumeric characters.
It is the primary secret used in the connection initiation process.
7 Check or clear the check box to enable or disable Bi-directional Authentication.
8 Click Continue.
9 Select a link speed from the drop-down menu.
10 Click Continue. The CHAP verification page appears.
11 Click Add Now.
12 Repeat steps 1 through 11 for all remote Compellent Connections.
Dell Compellent
177
Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Legacy Port Mode)

folder, the connection or initiator is added for all ports. If you select an individual card (in
Legacy Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port.
1 In the System Tree, select the iSCSI card node.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators. The Add
Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators wizard starts.
3 Enter the CHAP Name of the remote Compellent connection.
Note: To complete the CHAP Name, you can copy the CHAP name from the
remote Compellent port.
4 Enter the Remote Target Secret of the remote Compellent connection to be added to
the IO card.
Note: The Remote Target Secret defined in the remote Compellent CHAP
initiator must match the Target Secret used when adding the remote CHAP
enabled Compellent connection to the local Storage Center.
5 (Conditional) If using bi-directional CHAP, enter the Remote Port Secret.
Note: You can find the Remote Port Secret on the Advanced tab of the local
iSCSI port in the CHAP Secret field.
6 Click Add Now. The remote CHAP Initiator is added.
7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remote Compellent connection you are adding.
Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Virtual Port

Mode)
folder, the connection or initiator is added for all ports. If you select a control port (in Virtual
Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port.
1 In the System Tree, select the iSCSI folder.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections. The
Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections wizard starts.
3 Enter the IP Address of the remote Compellent domain control port.
4 Click Continue.
5 Enter the CHAP Name of the remote Compellent domain control port.
6 Enter a Target Secret.
Note: Bi-directional CHAP is not supported between remote Storage Centers
using virtual ports.
7 Click Continue.
8 Select a link speed from the drop-down menu.
9 Click Continue.
10 Click Add Now.
178
Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Virtual Port Mode)

folder, the connection or initiator is added for all ports. If you select a control port (in Virtual
Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port.
Note: Adding remote CHAP initiators for each remote physical port in the
domain is required for retain remote connections during controller failover.
1 Log on to a Storage Center on which you enabled CHAP.
2 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI folder.
Note: In a dual-controller configuration, it does not matter which of the two iSCSI
folders you select. Connecting the remote Storage Center to cards in one
controller connects remote Storage Center to all cards on both controllers.
3 From the shortcut menu, select Add Remote CHAP Initiators.
4 Enter the iSCSI Name of the remote Compellent physical port. You can copy the iSCSI
Name from the iSCSI Name field of the remote Compellent iSCSI port.
5 Add the CHAP Name of the remote Compellent domain control port. You can easily
copy the CHAP Name from the remote Compellent domain control port.
6 Enter the Target Secret in the Server CHAP Secret field.
Dell Compellent
179
Note: The Target Secret defined for the remote CHAP initiator must match the
Target Secret used when adding the remote CHAP enabled Compellent
connection to the local Storage Center.
7 Click Add Now.
8 Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each remote Compellent physical port connection in the
iSCSI domain.
Disable CHAP
Follow these tasks to disable CHAP in the Storage Center.
Note: If you disable CHAP, you must re-do all remote Compellent connections.
1 In the System Tree, select a control port or iSCSI card.
3 Click the CHAP tab.
4 Uncheck CHAP Authentication.
5 Click OK.
Change CHAP Authentication Settings

Follow these tasks to modify CHAP authentication requirements in the Storage Center.
3 Click Properties.
4 Click CHAP.
5 Select or clear CHAP Authentication Enabled. If it is enabled, enter the remote IO card
secret.
6 Select or clear Perform Mutual Authentication. If you select mutual authentication,
enter the connection secret and the remote connection secret.
Delete Remote CHAP Initiators from a Server

Follow these tasks to remove CHAP initiators from the server.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Remote CHAP Initiators.
3 Click Delete. System Manager asks you to confirm.
4 Click Yes. The CHAP initiator is deleted.
180
Managing IO Card Changes

The Configure IO Card Changes wizard simplifies the task of moving, replacing,
upgrading, or re-purposing IO cards in Storage Center controllers. The wizard is used to
configure IO card hardware changes on a per-port basis after physical IO card changes
have been made. The wizard is typically used when upgrading IO cards or controllers.
For each local port, you can specify:
If an IO card should be linked to an existing configuration
If the IO card is new hardware
If the configuration for a removed IO card should be deleted
The wizard guides you through the following actions:
Associating IO cards with existing port configurations
Indicating which IO cards are new hardware
Deleting configurations for IO cards that have been removed
Before using the wizard, you should be aware of the following:
Changes should be performed by a certified installer or with the assistance of Dell

Technical Support Services.
At least one back-end port must remain in its original location.
A controller restart is required to implement changes.
Do not rebalance any ports until controller(s) have been replaced and all hardware
configuration changes are complete.
Plan a Hardware Change

Upon boot, the Storage Center searches back-end targets for the configuration. Because a
controller cannot boot without configuration information, back-end access must be
maintained during the controller replacement procedure. This can be done in two ways:
Keep at least one common back-end slot/port defined and connected in the same
manner on the new hardware configuration as it was on the old hardware configuration.
Connect the back-end to a port that is undefined on the new hardware configuration.
Storage Center is able to detect iSCSI targets and acquire the boot configuration from
the drives even though the slot/port is marked as undefined.
When the appropriate back-end slot/port is identified, record this information on the Port
Usage Work Sheet and continue the upgrade process.
See Also
Port Usage Work Sheet on page 184
Dell Compellent
181
Change the Hardware

Changing hardware follows these general tasks. Refer to upgrade documentation for the
specific change for more detailed instructions.
1 Power down and unplug the controller. This reduces down time by facilitating recabling. In a dual-controller Storage Center, the second controller takes on all functions
of the Storage Center, preventing a system outage.
2 Record/tag the cabling for the affected card.
3 Disconnect the cables on the IO card.
4 Replace, move, or remove the IO card(s) and reconnect as recorded on the Port Usage
Work Sheet.
5 Plug in and power on the controller.
See Also
Port Usage Work Sheet on page 184
Configure IO Card Changes

Use the IO Card Change wizard to match previous port configurations with new ports.
1 Access the Configure IO Card Changes wizard in one of two ways:
Upon log on or browser refresh, System Manager automatically launches the wizard
if hardware changes are detected.
Right click on a controller and select Configure IO Card Changes.
2 When the wizard starts, note any warnings and click Continue to proceed.
Columns and information displayed on the next page of the wizard may differ depending
upon the transport type selected and whether the IO card represents existing, new, or
removed hardware.
Note: Replacing cards with different connection types (for example, FC with
SAS) may result in the previously occupied slot/port being placed in a down state
(Status = Down). The slot/port will be placed in an up state (Status = Up) when
the new configuration is saved and the controller is restarted.
182
Local ports are displayed separated by transport type (FC, iSCSI, or SAS). Select the
appropriate tab to configure the IO card changes for the ports of each transport type.
The columns and information displayed may differ depending upon the transport type
selected and whether the IO card is existing, new or removed hardware.
The pane identifies IO cards that have changed by:
Displaying Yes in the Changed column.
If applicable, the Previous Description and Previous Device Type fields contain
information about the IO card that previously occupied the slot/port.
Assign a New Link Configuration

System Manager may match a port to an existing configuration that appears to fit. Examine
each Link to determine if they are appropriate.
1 Use the drop-down menu in the Link to Configuration for Physical Port column to
assign new link configurations. Values for each port vary by transport type and whether
the IO card has been removed.
New IO Card. Do not use any existing port configurations. Indicates the port
will be configured as new hardware. Any existing configurations for the port are
deleted.
IO Card has been removed. Delete existing port configuration. Indicates that
System Manager has detected that the IO card for the port has been removed and
the existing configuration for the port should be deleted. Before selecting this option,
confirm that the IO card has actually been removed from the Storage Center and that
you want to delete the configuration for the port.
Not Set A placeholder that indicates a selection needs to be made for the port. For
ports with an existing IO card, this indicates that the System Manager is unable to
automatically link to an existing port configuration.
For ports on IO cards that have not been removed, a selection is shown for each
existing physical port configuration of the selected transport type. If there are no IO
card changes detected for the slot/port, the default is to use the existing configuration
for the port.
2 Click Assign Now. You are asked if you want to reset the controller. A controller restart
is required for new port roles to be assigned.
Note: To restore the default port selection for a selected transport, click Restore
Defaults. Resetting port configuration to the default selection overrides any
existing port selections.
3 Click Yes when asked if you want to restart the controller.
4 Repeat the process starting from Change the Hardware on page 182 to update the
remaining controller if required.
Restore a Default Port Selection

Select the Restore Defaults button to restore the default port selection for the selected
transport. Resetting port configuration to the default selection will override any existing port
selections.
Dell Compellent
183
Port Usage Work Sheet

For each controller, print and complete a copy of the following worksheet to record the
current configuration and the planned configuration changes.
Caution: One back end port must remain in the same location to enable access to
existing configuration information. Without this connection, the system will not boot.
BE Continuity Slot / Port
Slot 1
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 3
Port 4
Port Type (BE/FE)

Tagged
Target Slot / Port
Slot 2
Port Type (BE/FE)
Tagged
Target Slot / Port
Slot 3
Port Type (BE/FE)
Tagged
Target Slot / Port
Slot 4
Port Type (BE/FE)
Tagged
Target Slot / Port
Slot 5
Port Type (BE/FE)
Tagged
Target Slot / Port
Slot 6
Port 1
Port 2
Port Type (BE/FE)

Tagged
Target Slot / Port
184
Rebalancing Local Ports
Rebalancing Local Ports

Storage Center balances data storage between controller ports. If a controller has been
added or taken offline, ports can become unbalanced.
Note: Access is restricted while the rebalancing process is in progress.
1 In the System Tree, click the Controller icon. System Manager lists the controllers and
displays the local port condition as unbalanced.
2 From the display, right-click the Controller icon.
3 From the shortcut menu, select Rebalance Local Ports.
4 (Optional) To clear the automatic reminder from System Manager to rebalance local
ports, in the Rebalance Local Ports dialog box, select or clear Check for unbalanced
local ports at startup.
Dell Compellent
185
User Interface Reference for Controllers

This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show controller
information.
Controller General Tab

Selecting a controller in the System Tree opens the main window with a set of tabs across
the top. Each tab provides information about the controller. The controller General tab
provides an overview of the selected controller.
186
Field
Description
Controller Name
Name of current controller.
Type
Object type, in this case controller.
Model
Model number of the controller
Total Memory
Amount of memory installed in the controller.
Available Memory
Amount of unused memory.
Controller ID
Number that identifies the Storage Center.
Dell Asset Tag
Number assigned to the controller for tracking or security purposes.
Dell Service Tag
Number that identifies the controller to Dell Technical Support

Services.
Version
Software version of controller.
Dell Compellent
Field
Description
Leader
Indicates if a controller is the leader (True) or not the leader (False).

If a controller is not the leader, it is a peer.
Last Boot Time
Date and time of last reboot.
Status
Status of controller may be Up or Down.
Local Port Condition
Condition of local port may be Balanced or Unbalanced.
Ether0 (MGMT) Interface
IP, Net Mask, and Gateway addresses for the ethernet management
interface.
Primary DNS Server
Address of the primary Domain Name System (DNS) server.
Secondary DNS Server
(Optional) Address of the secondary Domain Name System (DNS)

server.
Domain Name
Domain name for the controller.
Date Created
Date that the controller was set up for use in Storage Center.
Created By
System user name under which the controller was set up.
Date Updated
Date that the controller software was updated.
Updated By
System user name under which the controller was updated.
Notes
Additional information entered about the controller.
187
Controller CPU PerformanceTab

The controller CPU Performance tab shows the CPU and memory usage for the most
current one-hour period.
Controller Back Tab

The controller CPU Back tab shows IO card, port, and power supply locations.
188
Hover the cursor over an object to view more information.
Right-click on an object to view additional options.
Controller General Properties

Selecting a controller in the System Tree and clicking Properties opens a page with a set
of tabs across the top. Each tab provides information about the controller. The controller
General tab provides an overview of the selected controller.
Field
Description
Controller Name
Name of current controller.
Type
Object type, in this case controller.
Status
Status of controller may be Up or Down.
Local Port Condition
Condition of local port may be Balanced or Unbalanced.
Leader
Indicates if a controller is the leader (True) or not the leader (False).

If a controller is not the leader, it is a peer.
Controller ID
Number that identifies the Storage Center.
Last Boot Time
Date and time of last reboot.
See Also
Change the Controller Name on page 142
Dell Compellent
189
Controller IP Properties
Use the IP tab to set or change IP addresses. This tab is used primarily to set the IP address
when using IPv6 for communication with Storage Center.
Caution: Do not change IP properties in the Controller Properties dialog box
without the guidance of a Dell Technical Support Services. Changing IP properties
can result in the loss of data.
Field
Description
Ether0 (MGMT) Interface
IP, Net Mask, and Gateway addresses for the ethernet MGMT
interface. Storage Center uses IPv4 for the Management Interface,
however IPv6 may be used.
For IPv6, you must also enter the IPv6 Prefix Length.
190
Ether1 (IPC) Interface
IP, Net Mask, and Gateway addresses for the ethernet IPC interface.
IPC Interface must use IPv4.
Primary DNS Server
Address of the primary Domain Name System (DNS) server.
Secondary DNS Server
(Optional) Address of the secondary Domain Name System (DNS)

server.
Domain Name
Domain name for the controller.
iDRAC (BMC) Interface
(Conditional) iDRAC is the Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller.

BMC is the Baseboard Management Controller.
Configure via: Displays network configuration mode may be

Static or DHCP.
If iDRAC is configured as Static, addresses are displayed for IP,

Net Mask, and Gateway. If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) is configured, these fields are blank.
See Also
Controller Info Properties

Use the Info tab to view creation and update information about the controller and to add
notes for reference.
See Also
Add Controller Notes on page 142
Dell Compellent
191
192
Disks
This section describes how to view and manages disks and disk folders, and work with
Storage Profiles. Only administrators can perform these tasks. Some commands, indicated
in the command description, are available only when specifically included in administrator
privileges.
Contents
Disk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Managing Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Rebalancing RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Managing Disk Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Managing Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
About Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Applying Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Managing Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Using Manual Storage Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
User Interface Reference for Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Dell Compellent
193
Chapter 7 Disks
Disk Management
System Manager displays disks both physically and logically.
Physically, disks are grouped by the enclosure in which they reside as shown in the
Enclosures folder.
Logically, disks by type, such as a 7.2K, 10K, 15K, or Solid State Disk (SSD). Disks
types are grouped without regard to IO speed.
For example, 7.2K disks in a SAS enclosure is in the same RAID level as 7.2K drives in
an SBOD enclosure. A disk folder contains both managed and spare drives. Managed
drives are used for data storage. Spare drives are held in reserve to automatically
replace a drive if a managed drive fails.
Storage Types
Storage type describes a pool of storage (disk folder) with a single datapage size and a
specified redundancy level. The standard storage type is 2 MB redundant. This selection is
appropriate for most applications.
However, the following additional page sizes are also available:
512 KB: Appropriate for applications with high performance needs, or in environments
in which Replays are taken frequently under heavy IO. Selecting this size reduces the
amount of space System Manager can present to servers.
4 MB: Appropriate for systems that use a large amount of disk space with infrequent
Replays.
The ability to change the datapage size and redundancy settings to create a non-standard
storage type are available on the Advanced tab of System Management Volume
Configure My Volume Defaults menu option.
Note: Because Data Progression (an automatic process that moves infrequently
accessed data to slower disks) cannot move data between storage types, a second
storage type is a less efficient use of storage. You should create a non-standard
storage type only when an application program requires a datapage size smaller or
larger than the default 2 MB datapage.
See Also
Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type on page 210.
Storage Classes
Storage classes exist within each storage type for which a disk folder has been prepared.
Each storage class represents allocated RAID space within a tier of disks in the disk folder.
For redundant storage types, RAID levels of storage classes within each tier depend on the
redundancy level selected for that tier.
194
Single-redundant tiers can contain storage classes of RAID 10, RAID 5-5, or RAID 5-9.
Dual-redundant tiers can contain storage classes of RAID 10-Dual Mirror, RAID 6-6, or
RAID 6-10.
Non-redundant storage types use RAID 0 in all classes, in all tiers.
Managing Disks
Managing Disks
As data begins to consume disk space, you will need to add enclosures and disks to the
Storage Center. The supported maximum number of enclosures attached to a Storage
Center depends on the type of enclosure being used.
When adding disks, be aware of the following:
After disks are added, additional space may not be immediately available. Make sure
that you allow enough time for System Manager to allocate space to be used for writes.
Create a new disk folder only to address specific application program requirements.
Creating a second disk folder may cause storage to be used less efficiently.
Data cannot be written to unassigned disks.
The Assigned disk folder was created when the Storage Center was set up. Managing
unassigned disks means moving the disk into a managed (Assigned) disk folder.
View Tiers
Disks are initially configured when Storage Center is set up. In most configurations, all disks
form a single pool of storage in a managed disk folder. By default, the managed disk folder
is named Assigned. Disks of different classifications, such as 15K or 10K are all part of the
managed disk folder.
Storage Center assigns disks of different classifications to one of three tiers. Tier 1 is the
highest performance tier; Tier 3 is the most cost efficient tier.
1 In the System Tree, select the Assigned disk folder. Disk tiers appear.
Note: Storage Center automatically migrates less frequently accessed data to lower
tiers.
Dell Compellent
195
Chapter 7 Disks
Modify Tier Redundancy

Modifying tier redundancy requires a RAID rebalance to be completed, and should not be
performed unless sufficient free disk space is available within the disk folder.
Storage tiers are automatically ranked by disk performance. Tier 1 is fastest and Tier 3 the
slowest.
1 In the System Tree, select a disk folder.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Configure Storage. The Configure Storage wizard
starts. Use this screen to configure the redundancy level of each tier of storage within
this storage type.
3 Click Modify Tier Redundancy for the tier to change.
196
Managing Disks
Note: Default redundancy for each disk tier is based on the size of disks in the
tier. With the release of Storage Center 6.2, users can no longer change tier
redundancy to single redundant in any tier with a 1 TB or larger disk drive.
(Exception) Seven disks are the minimum requirement for configuring RAID 6
with a single spare. If a tier does not contain seven disks, default redundancy is
single redundant for any disk drive size.
4 In the Modify Tier Redundancy dialog box, select Single Redundant or Dual
Redundant. If you change from Single Redundant to Dual Redundant, notice that:
RAID 5-5 Standard becomes RAID 6-6 Standard
RAID 5-5 Fast becomes RAID 6-6 Fast (if Fast Track is licensed)
RAID 5-9 Standard becomes RAID 6-10 Standard
RAID 5-9 Fast becomes RAID 6-10 Fast (if Fast Track is licensed)
RAID 10 Standard becomes RAID 10-DM Standard
RAID 10 Fast becomes RAID 10-DM Fast (if Fast Track is licensed)
5 Click OK to change redundancy or Cancel to stop the operation.

6 Repeat for all the tiers to modify.
7 Click OK.
8 If any of the modified tiers contain disks, perform a RAID Rebalance to complete the
tier redundancy modification.
If System Manager determines that there is sufficient disk space to rebalance data
across drives, a rebalance is started automatically.
If there does not appear to be enough disk space available in the disk folder to allow
for a RAID Rebalance, System Manager asks you to add storage.
See Also
Rebalancing RAID on page 203
Dell Compellent
197
Chapter 7 Disks
Manage Unassigned Disks

The Manage Unassigned Disks wizard takes you through a three-part process in which
you select the new disks, identify disks to be used as Hot Spares, and rebalance RAID.
1 In the Storage Management menu, select Disk Scan for Disks. Storage Center
scans for new disks.
2 After the scan, any unassigned disks appear in the Unassigned disk folder. If there are
no unassigned disks, the Unassigned disk folder is not displayed.
3 To manage unassigned disks, select the Disks node.
4 From the shortcut menu, select Manage Unassigned Disks. The Manage
Unassigned Disks wizard starts and displays a list of disks that are unassigned.
5 By default, all disks are selected. Click on a check box to deselect a disk.
6 Click Continue.
Note: If there is a second disk folder, System Manager asks you to select the
folder into which the new disks should be placed. Otherwise, System Manager
displays a list of the disks you selected and asks you to select disks to be
designated as hot spares.
7 Select the disk(s) to be designated as the hot spare(s). If a disk fails, Storage Center
automatically rebuilds the data that was on the failed disk on to the hot spare disk. Hot
spares do not count toward usable storage, but each spare adds to the resiliency of your
Storage Center. Depending on your configuration, select one or more disks as spares.
8 Click Continue. The wizard displays the disk folder, hot spares, and disks in the disk
folder you are modifying or creating, and attributes for each disk.
9 (Optional) Click Back to cycle through the previous screens to change hot spares or
selected disks.
10 Click Add Disks Now to add the disks to the disk folder.
198
Managing Disks
Modify Storage: Allows you to configure a redundancy level (dual or single) for each
tier of storage within the disk folder. Be sure to modify storage before you rebalance
new disks.
Schedule Rebalance: Enables you to defer rebalancing until a later time.
Rebalance Now: Restripes data on to all available disks within a disk folder.
Rebalancing runs in the background with low priority. Depending on your
configuration, rebalancing can take as long as several days. However, to fully use all
available space, disks must be rebalanced.
See Also
Managing Storage Types on page 209
Dell Compellent
199
Chapter 7 Disks
Release a Managed Disk

When a managed disk is released from a folder, data in the folder is re-striped on the
remaining disks. For this reason, you should not release disks from a folder unless the
remaining disks have enough free space to accommodate re-striping the data.
Caution: Never release a managed disk without Dell Technical Support Services
assistance.
1 In the System Tree, select the disk(s) to release.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Release Disk. The Release Disk wizard starts.
If the selected disk does not contain user data, the disk is released immediately. If a
rebalance is required, a dialog box opens asking if you wish to rebalance RAID
devices now, later, or skip balancing.
Note: Skipping the rebalance may leave disks in a transitioning state. That is,
System Manager may not use the disk(s) until a balance occurs.
If the selected disk contains user data, the disk is not released immediately and a
warning message is displayed.
If you selected multiple disks with and without user data, disks without user data will
be released immediately and disks with user data will display a warning.
3 After the restripe is complete, if the disk does not appear in the Unassigned folder, click
Scan for Disks.
200
Managing Disks
Revert a Released Disk to Managed

If a released disk is transitioning to an unmanaged state as indicated by a yellow icon
overlay, you can revert the released disk back to being managed.
1 In the System Tree, select a transitioning disk.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Revert to Managed. The Revert to Managed wizard
starts.
3 Click Yes (Revert Now) to revert the disk. The disk immediately reverts to managed and
a dialog box opens asking if you wish to rebalance RAID devices now, later, or skip
balancing.
4 Select Skip to exit the wizard.
Dell Compellent
201
Chapter 7 Disks
Delete a Disk
You can only delete disks that have failed or disks that have been released.
Prerequisites
Before deleing a disk make sure that one of the following is true:
The disk has failed and it has no User Allocated Blocks. A failed disk appears with a
red dot. On the General tab, its status is reported as Down and health is reported as
Unhealthy.
The disk has been released.
Steps
1 In the System Tree, select the disk(s) to delete.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. The wizard prompts you to confirm.
3 Click Yes. System Manager deletes the disk(s) from the folder and closes the wizard.
You can now physically remove the disk(s) from the Storage Center disk enclosure.
Show Disk Placement in an Enclosure

Follow these steps to see where a disk is located in the enclosure.
1 In the System Tree, select a disk.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Show Disk in Enclosure. System Manager switches to
physical view and the disk position is highlighted.
Alert for Disk with Single Path

By default, disks have two paths to the controller. If one path is disconnected, a port fails,
or a path is cabled incorrectly, the controller has only one path to the disk. This is a single
point of failure. Make sure you are alerted if only one path remains to a disk.
1 In the System Tree, select the disk(s) to be included in the alert.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. System Manager displays the Disk
Properties information with the General tab selected.
3 Select or clear Alert when only one path is available.
4 (Optional) Add notes on the Info tab.
5 Click OK.
202
Rebalancing RAID
Rebalancing RAID
Rebalancing RAID restripes data to optimize the use of disk space. System Manager
distributes data as evenly as possible across disks in a disk folder. Operations such as
adding or removing disks or modifying redundancy levels can cause data to be unevenly
distributed across disks.
The RAID rebalance process redistributes data. This process also can be used to move
data off disks that were moved to another disk folder. RAID rebalancing moves the lowest
scoring RAID devices first beginning with the smallest RAID devices.
RAID rebalancing has the potential to fail or deadlock when moving some RAID devices. If
this occurs, it may be necessary to add more disk space to the Storage Center to allow
RAID rebalancing to complete.
The following information is provided when a RAID rebalance is in progress:
Dell Compellent
Field
Description
Rebalance Start Time
Time at which the Rebalance was started.
Estimated Completion Time
Estimated time at which the rebalance completes. This information is

not available until the rebalance has been running for a sufficient
amount of time to create an estimate. Depending upon the amount
of data on your Storage Center, the time required for RAID
rebalancing can vary greatly. RAID rebalancing takes longer when a
Storage Center is running low on space, or when temporary devices
must be created to allow for the replacement of existing devices.
Percent Complete
Percent of allocated space that has been rebalanced.
Space Remaining
Amount of space remaining to be rebalanced of the initial amount of

space requiring a rebalance.
203
Chapter 7 Disks
View Rebalance Status

The RAID Rebalance wizard shows rebalance status.
From the Storage Management menu select Disk Rebalance RAID. The RAID
Rebalance wizard starts.
The wizard displays information about the current status of RAID rebalancing. The options
available vary depending on the rebalance state. A RAID rebalance may be in one of the
following states:
204
State
Description
Rebalance Not Needed
RAID rebalancing is not currently running and no classes of storage

report requiring rebalance.
Rebalance Needed
One or more classes of storage on the Storage Center reports

requiring a rebalance.
In Progress
Rebalancing is currently in progress.
Final Pass In Progress
Rebalancing is completing its final pass.
Rebalance Complete
Rebalancing is complete.
Rebalance Failed
Rebalancing has been performed, but one or more classes of

storage still reports requiring a rebalance.
Rebalance Stopping
A user has requested that rebalancing be stopped.
Rebalance Stopped
Rebalancing has been stopped prematurely by a user.
Rebalancing RAID
RAID Rebalance Options

Depending on the current state of RAID rebalance, the Rebalance RAID wizard may
display any of the following options.
Option
Description
Rebalance Now
Starts an immediate rebalancing process.
Schedule Rebalance
Allows rebalancing to be scheduled for a later time.
Stop Rebalance
Stops the rebalancing process after the current pass. This may take
several minutes.
Close
Closes the RAID Rebalance wizard. If a rebalance is in progress,

System Manager continues to rebalance data in the background until
complete. Reopen the wizard to monitor rebalance progress by
opening the Storage Management menu and selecting
Disk Rebalance RAID.
View a RAID Rebalance Schedule

The RAID rebalance schedule can be accessed through the View menu.
From the View menu select Scheduled Events. If scheduled, the RAID Rebalance
appears as a scheduled event.
Dell Compellent
205
Chapter 7 Disks
Schedule a RAID Rebalance

Although RAID rebalancing is a background process, depending on the size and activity of
your Storage Center, rebalancing can take weeks. Schedule it accordingly.
1 From the Storage Management menu select Disk Rebalance RAID. The RAID
Rebalance wizard starts.
2 Click Schedule RAID Rebalance. The following wizard starts.
3 Enter the date or use the drop-down menu to view a calendar. Use the up and down
arrows to select the time.
4 Click Save Schedule.
Delete a RAID Rebalance

Use the View menu to locate the event to delete.
1 From the View menu, select Scheduled Events. The RAID Rebalance appears as a
scheduled event.
2 Select the Rebalance event.
4 Click Yes.
206
Managing Disk Folders
Managing Disk Folders

A managed disk folder was created during installation and setup. In most cases, a Storage
Center should have only one folder of managed disks. If additional disks are added to the
Storage Center, they should be added to the managed disk folder. Unassigned disks
appear in the Unassigned Disk folder.
Note: Because Data Progression does not migrate storage across disk folders, a
second disk folder impacts the ability of Storage Center to maximize performance.
Only in rare circumstances do the benefits of multiple disk folders outweigh the
disadvantages.
Create a Disk Folder

The Create Disk Folder wizard steps through the process of creating a disk folder.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select Disk Folder Create Disk Folder.
The Create Disk Folder wizard starts. If a disk folder already exists, the Create Disk
Folder wizard asks if you are sure you want to create a second disk folder.
2 To create second disk folder, click Yes. System Manager displays unassigned disks to
be added to the new folder. Only unassigned disks can be added to a disk folder.
3 From the list of unmanaged disks, select disks to be included in the new disk folder. By
default all disks are selected.
4 Click Continue. System Manager displays the disks you selected, and asks you to
select one or more disks to be a hot spare. A hot spare replaces a failed disk and is held
in reserve until needed. The hot spare disk must be as large or larger than the largest
disk of its type in the disk folder. For redundancy, there mustbeatleastonehotspare
foreachenclosure. By default, if there are disks of differing sizes, Storage Center
selects the largest disk, or one of them. You cannot create a disk folder without a hot
spare.
5 Select the disk to use as a hot spare or accept the default.
6 Click Continue.
7 Enter a folder name and any optional notes about the disk folder.
8 If not using Advanced options, go to Step 11.
Dell Compellent
207
Chapter 7 Disks
9 (Optional) Click Advanced. System Manger displays advanced options that allow you
to specify tier redundancy and datapage size or to select non-redundant storage.
Note: Default redundancy for each disk tier is based on the size of disks in the
tier. With the release of Storage Center 6.2, users can no longer change tier
redundancy to single redundant in any tier with a 1 TB or larger disk drive.
(Exception) Seven disks are the minimum requirement for configuring RAID 6
with a single spare. If a tier does not contain seven disks, default redundancy is
single redundant for any disk drive size.
10 Select the redundancy and datapage options and click Continue.
11 Click Create Now. The disk folder is created.
Rename a Disk Folder

Folder properties are available only for local, managed disk folders. No folder properties
are available for Unassigned or External Device folders.
1 In the System Tree, select a disk folder, such as Assigned.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Disk Folder Properties window
appears.
3 Enter a name in the Disk Folder field.

4 Click OK.
Delete a Disk Folder

Before a disk folder can be deleted, it must be empty of disks. Release or delete all disks
within a folder before you delete the disk folder.
2 Release or delete all disks within the folder
3 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager asks you to confirm. Click Yes.
208
Managing Storage Types
Managing Storage Types

When Storage Center was setup, System Manager automatically selected redundancy
levels depending upon size of disks in the folder. See the Storage Center System Setup
Guide for more information.
Remove a Storage Class

Removing a storage class is not allowed unless the Allow removal of storage classes
user default is selected. Changes to this setting are not reflected in the Configure Storage
wizard until it is closed and reopened.
appears.
3 Select the Storage Class to delete.
4 Click Remove Storage Class.
Note: System Manager warns you that before proceeding with this modification.
It is advised that you contact Dell Technical Support Services for assistance.
See Also
Configuring User Volume Defaults on page 317
Add a Storage Class

Changes to this setting are not reflected in the Configure Storage wizard until it is closed
and reopened.
appears.
3 Select a Storage Class.
4 Click Add Class. If all allowed classes of storage have been created, the Add Class
option does not appear.
5 Select Continue to return to Storage Type selection.
Dell Compellent
209
Chapter 7 Disks
Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type

You can prepare a disk folder for a non-standard storage type only if your User Volume
defaults permit you to do so.
1 In the System Tree, select a disk folder, such as Assigned.
opens.
3 To add another storage type, click Prepare for Additional Storage Type. Because
additional storage types decrease the efficiency of Data Progression, System Manager
warns you that additional storage types are inefficient.
4 Click Yes (Prepare Now). A page allowing you to select redundancy appears.
5 Click Redundant or Non-Redundant.
Redundant storage may be either Single Redundant or Dual Redundant, depending
upon your tier redundancy configuration and disk size. For disks that are 900GB or
greater in size, that tier and all tiers below it default to dual redundant storage.
210
Single-redundant storage protects against the loss of any one drive.
RAID 10 (each disk is mirrored)
RAID 5-5 (striped across 5 drives)
RAID 5-9 (striped across 9 drives)
Dual-redundant storage protects against the loss of any two drives:
RAID 10 Dual-Mirror (data is written simultaneously to three separate disks)
RAID 6-6 (4 data segments, 2 parity segments for each stripe)
RAID 6-10 (8 data segments, 2 parity segments for each stripe)
Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type
Non-Redundant storage uses RAID 0. Data is striped but provides no redundancy. If

one disk fails, all data is lost. Do not use non-redundant storage for a volume unless the
data has been backed up elsewhere.
6 On the next page, select the redundancy for each tier and select the datapage size to
be used. It is recommended that you only prepare a disk folder for a single datapage
size to optimize disk utilization and I/O performance. Only prepare for additional types
of storage to address specific application needs.
Caution: If you are considering using either the 512 KB or 4 MB datapage
setting, contact Dell Technical Support Services so that resources remain
balanced and impact on performance is considered.
2 MB: The default datapage size, this selection is appropriate for most application
program needs.
512 KB: This datapage size is appropriate for application programs with high
performance needs, or environments in which Replays are taken frequently under
heavy I/O. Selecting this size reduces the amount of space System Manager can
present to servers.
4 MB: This datapage size is appropriate for configurations that use a large amount
of disk space with infrequent Replays.
7 Click Prepare Now. The disk folder is prepared for the selected type of storage. It is not
used until a volume is created with that Storage Type. System Manager asks if you want
to Prepare for Additional Storage Type or Close.
8 Click Close.
See Also
Set Storage Volume Defaults on page 322
Dell Compellent
211
Chapter 7 Disks
About Storage Profiles

Storage Profiles provided with System Manager are the most effective way to manage data
in Storage Center. For this reason, access to Storage Profiles is controlled by user settings,
and Storage Profiles may not be visible to all users.
Storage Profiles Provided in System Manager

If Data Progression is licensed, cost and performance are optimized when all volumes use
the Recommended Storage Profile.
If Data Progression is not licensed, the default Storage Profile is High Priority, which stores
data on Tier 1. When Tier 1 is full, data is then stored on the next lower available tier.
Without Data Progression, you must configure volumes to use a specific tier of storage.
Data will not migrate between tiers.
Because SSDs are automatically assigned to Storage Tier 1, the profiles that include
Storage Tier 1 allow volumes to use SSD storage:
On Storage Centers without licensed Data Progression, the High profile includes SSDs.
Make sure only volumes you want to use SSDs are assigned to the High profile.
Reassign all other volumes to either the Medium or Low profiles.
On Storage Centers with licensed Data Progression, the Recommended profile

includes SSDs. Make sure only volumes you want to use SSDs are assigned to the
Recommended profile. Create and apply a new profile that does not include Storage
Tier 1 for all other volumes.
If your user volume defaults allow you to select a Storage Profile, System Manager displays
profiles in the System Tree under the Storage node.
Recommended (All Tiers)

The Recommended Storage Profile is available only when Data Progression is licensed.
To optimize Data Progression and performance on the Storage Center, create volumes with
the Recommended Storage Profile. The Recommended profile allows the automatic data
progression between and across all storage tiers based on data type and usage.
High Priority (Tier 1)

The High Priority Storage Profile provides the highest performance. High Priority limits
the data stored on the highest tier of disks. It is efficient in terms of using RAID 5 or 6, but
it uses more expensive media to store the data. Creating a volume using the High Priority
Storage Profile stores written data on Tier 1, RAID 10 (mirrored drives). Replay data is
stored on Tier 1, RAID 5/RAID 6. Storage Center does not migrate data to lower storage
tiers unless Tier 1 storage becomes full.
Medium Priority (Tier 2)

The Medium Priority Storage Profile provides a balance between performance and cost
efficiency. Creating a volume using the Medium Priority Storage Profile stores written data
on RAID 10, Tier 2. Replay data is stored on RAID 5/RAID 6, Tier 2. Storage Center does
not migrate data to other storage tiers unless Tier 2 storage becomes full.
Low Priority (Tier 3)

The Low Priority Storage Profile provides the most-cost efficient storage. Creating a
volume using the Low Priority Storage Profile stores written data on RAID 10, Tier 3.
Replay data is stored on RAID 5/6, Tier 3. Storage Center does not migrate data to higher
tiers of storage unless Tier 3 storage becomes full.
212
About Storage Profiles
Custom Profiles for SSDs

For best performance with Data Progression, Dell recommends using the storage profiles
provided with System Manager. In some cases, a storage architect may recommend using
one of the following custom profiles for handling specific types of data, such as for using
solid state drives (SSDs) to improve application performance.
SSD Best Practice

This profile uses Data Progression in a standard three-tier arrangement, placing the SSDs
in Tier 1 for write operations. Use this profile when the speed of the SSD is not required for
data reads. You must be in Manual Mode to set up this profile.
Tier 1 RAID 10 Writes
Tier 2 RAID 5 Replays
Tier 3 RAID 5 or RAID 6 Replays (For drives over 1 TB, dual redundancy is
implemented using RAID 6.)
See Also
Using Manual Storage Mode on page 218
Two-tiered Profile
This profile is beneficial when the Storage Center has a limited number of SSD drives or if
some data types do not need the advantage of SSD drives.
Tier 2 RAID 10 Writes, RAID 5 Replays
Tier 3 RAID 6 Replays
Read Performance Improvement

This profile uses Tier 1 for most operations, but allows data to move to other tiers if Tier 1
fills up.
Tier 1 RAID 10 Writes, RAID 5 Replays
Manual Mode
If the Storage Center has fewer than nine active drives in Tier 1, but more than nine active
drives in Tier 2, use Manual mode to change the stripe width. Changing the stripe width
helps to maintain the efficiency of both tiers.
Caution: After being enabled, Manual Mode cannot be disabled. Dell Compellent
strongly recommends contacting Dell Technical Support Services before enabling
Manual Mode.
Tier 1 5-wide stripe (SSD tier)
Tier 2 9-wide stripe
Disk Folder
You can manage SSD storage without creating a custom profile by creating a disk folder to
isolate volumes with high IO. This method is useful for an application with a small data set
but large IO requirement.
See Also
Create a Disk Folder on page 207
Dell Compellent
213
Chapter 7 Disks
Applying Storage Profiles

Storage Profiles can only be selected, applied, or changed if the option is set for a user in
User Volume Defaults.
Identify a Storage Profile

The User Volume Defaults setting determines whether Storage Profile information is
available.
If a user is allowed to select a Storage Profile, a list of available Storage Profiles will
appear in the System Tree for that user.
If a user is not allowed to select a Storage Profile, System Manager applies the default
Storage Profile to all new volumes and there is no list of available profiles in the System
Tree.
The Volume General tab displays the Storage Profile attached to a volume.
Allow Storage Profile Selection

Follow these steps to configure user volume default settings to allow a user to select
storage profiles. If you change User Volume Defaults, new user volumes will be created
using the new settings, existing volumes are not affected.
1 In the System Tree, select a user.
2 Click Configure Users Volume Defaults or Configure new Users Volume Defaults.
3 Make sure Allow User to Modify Preferences is checked.
Note: If Data Progression is not licensed, the Recommended profile is not
displayed as a choice because data cannot be migrated between tiers.
5 Select the Default Storage Profile to be used when creating a volume.
6 Optionally, check the box that enables the user to select the Storage Profile to be used.
214
Applying Storage Profiles
Note: Changing Advanced volume defaults can adversely affect Storage Center
performance. Dell Compellent recommends contacting Dell Technical Support
Services before changing any Advanced options.
7 Click OK. User volume defaults are set.
Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes

Follow these steps to apply a Storage Profile to multiple volumes in a single task.
1 Select a Storage Profile.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Apply to Volume(s). A list of existing volumes appears.
3 Select one or more volumes.
4 Click Continue. The System Manager asks you to confirm.
5 Click Apply Now. The Storage Profile you select is applied to the selected volumes.
Data will be migrated during the next scheduled Data Progression run.
6 Click OK.
See Also
Allow Storage Profile Selection on page 214
Apply a Storage Profile to a Single Volume

Follow these steps to apply a Storage Profile to a single volume.
1 Select a volume.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Volume Properties window appears.
3 Click the Storage tab.
4 Select the Storage Profile for the volume, and click OK.
See Also
View Volumes Configured with a Storage Profile

Follow these steps to see which volumes are currently using a specific Storage Profile.
1 From the list of Storage Profiles, select a profile. The General Storage Profile window
appears.
2 Click the Volumes tab. A list of volumes using this profile appears.
See Also
Dell Compellent
215
Chapter 7 Disks
Managing Storage Profiles

The standard Storage Profiles packaged with the Storage Center cannot be modified. You
can only modify user-created profiles. Changes to a Storage Profile will impact all volumes
currently using the profile. To manage Storage Profiles, Allow Storage Profile Selection
must be enabled in user volume defaults.
Create a New Storage Profile

Follow these steps to create a new storage profile.
1 In the System Tree, select Storage.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Manage Storage Profiles. The Manage Storage
Profiles wizard starts, displaying all Storage Profiles.
3 Click New Profile.
4 Select a RAID level and a storage tier.
5 Click Continue. A window allowing you to name the Storage Profile appears. The
default name is based on the RAID level and tiers of the profile. Accept the default or
enter a new name for the Storage Profile.
7 Click Create Now. The profile is created.
Modify a Storage Profile

Follow these steps to modify an existing profile
3 Click Modify Profile.
4 A window appears, showing the RAID and Tier setting for this Storage Profile.
5 Select or clear RAID and tier levels.
6 Click Continue.
7 A window allowing you to name the modified Storage Profile appears. The default name
is based on the RAID level and tiers of the profile. Accept the default or enter a new
name for the Storage Profile.
9 Click Apply Changes. The profile is modified. Changes will be applied to all volumes
using this profile. Data will begin to move the next time Data Progression is run.
10 Click Close to close the wizard.
See Also
216
Managing Storage Profiles
Delete a User-Created Storage Profile

Follow these steps to delete a storage profile.
Prerequisites
You cannot delete Storage Profiles that are:
Created by the system. To view by whom a Profile was created, select a Storage Profile.
The General information window displays the creator.
In use by a volume. To view which volumes, if any, are in use, select a Storage Profile.
Click the Volumes tab.
Steps
3 Select a user-created Storage Profile.
4 Click Delete Profile.
5 System Manager asks you to confirm.
6 Click Yes to delete the profile.
Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes

You can apply a Storage Profile to all volumes, all volumes in a volume group, or to selected
volumes.
3 Click Apply Profile. A list of Volumes appears.
4 Select one or more volumes or volume groups.
5 Click Continue. System Manager displays the volume and volume folders to which this
profile will be applied.
6 Review the list and click Apply Now to approve.
Dell Compellent
217
Chapter 7 Disks
Using Manual Storage Mode

Manual Storage Mode provides access to more detailed storage options. This mode should
only be used with assistance from Dell Technical Support Services.
Enable Manual Storage Mode

When Manual Storage Mode is enabled, the Create Storage Profile wizard provides
options for RAID 6 for dual-redundant storage.
Caution: After being enabled, Manual Mode cannot be disabled. Dell Compellent
strongly recommends contacting Dell Technical Support Services before enabling
Manual Mode.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Setup Enable Manual
Storage Mode. A warning window appears.
2 To enable, click Continue.
Create a Storage Profile in Manual Mode

Manually creating a Storage Profile is the only way to create exceptions to the stripe width
set in System Properties.
1 In the System Tree, select the Storage Profiles icon.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Storage Profile. The Create Storage Profile
wizard starts.
Note: Choices made in the Manual Mode version of the Create Storage Profile
wizard override the stripe width set in System Properties. See Viewing
Background Processes on page 283.
3 When RAID levels, tiers, and redundancy (if any) are set, click Continue. Storage
Center asks you to name the Storage Profile.
5 Click Create Now.
218
Using Manual Storage Mode
View a Storage Profile Created in Manual Mode

In contrast to Storage Profiles created in normal mode, a Storage Profile that is created in
Manual Mode displays more detailed information as shown below.
Instead of displaying the Writable and Replay tiers used, Storage Profiles created in
Manual Mode displays all tiers, including tiers on which data will not be stored using this
profile.
Change RAID Stripe Width in Manual Mode

If Manual Mode is enabled you can change RAID stripe width in System Storage Properties.
Changes affect only system-created Storage Profiles, not user-created Storage Profiles.
Dell Compellent
219
Chapter 7 Disks
User Interface Reference for Disks

This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show disk
information.
General Disk Information

When you select a disk In the System Tree, general information about the disk appears in
the main window.
Field
Description
Position
Listed as enclosure and position. For example, disk 01-01 resides in

Enclosure 1, disk 1. To view the position of a disk in an enclosure,
select a disk. From the shortcut menu, select Show Disk in
Enclosure. The command displays the physical location of the disk.
Index
Number required by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with

Folder
Disk folder in which this disk resides.
Control Type
A disk can be one of following types:

Spare: Reserved for use if a disk fails.
Managed: Part of a managed disk folder. Data is striped across all
drives in a managed disk folder (except reserved Hot Spares).
Unmanaged: Disk that is recognized by Storage Center but has not
yet been assigned to a managed disk folder. An unmanaged disk
cannot store data.
Foreign Managed: Disk recognized by the Storage Center but not
managed by it. A foreign managed disk could have been managed
previously by another Storage Center or another manufacturer.
When the disk is assigned, it becomes managed.
Type
220
Object type in this case disk.
Field
Description
Enclosure
Enclosures are installed and numbered starting at the bottom of a

rack.
Classification
Type of disk such as 7 K, 10 K, 15 K, or SSD.
Status
Disk status may be Up or Down.
Health
Disk health may be Healthy or Unhealthy.
Path Alert
Either none or alert text, such as: Disk 5 only one path to device.
Actual Capacity, Free Space, Various measures of disk capacity.

and Manufacturer Capacity
Vendor, Product, Revision,
Vendor Spec, and Serial
Number
Product information from vendor.
Total, Unallocated, System

Allocated, User Allocated,
and Bad
Block counts for various items.
Disk Statistics
Number of read/write requests, blocks, and errors.
Date Detected
Date and time Storage Center detected the disk.
Date Updated
Date and time a user last modified or managed the disk.
See Also
Manage Unassigned Disks on page 198
Release a Managed Disk on page 200
Delete a Disk on page 202
Show Disk Placement in an Enclosure on page 202
Dell Compellent
221
Chapter 7 Disks
Disk Enclosure Information

When you select an enclosure in the System Tree hardware status information appears in
the main window.
222
Field
Description
Name
Name assigned to the enclosure.
Index
Number required by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with

Shelf ID
ID assigned with respect to other rack components.
Status Description
Disk status may be Up or Down.
Indicator
Indicator light located on the enclosure in the rack may be On or

Off
Logical ID
Internal ID assigned to the enclosure
Enclosure Type
Type of enclosure.
Model/Revision
Dell part number and revision.
A Side Firmware
Firmware version of EMM (or SBB).
B Side Firmware
Firmware version of EMM (or SBB).
Unrecoverable Condition
Indication of failure may be On or Off
Critical Condition
Non-Critical Condition
Enclosure Hardware Status

Expanding an enclosure in the System Tree displays the hardware nodes.
Temperature Sensors
For an enclosure, displays temp properties including position of the sensor, status, and
current temp. The temperature gauge displays temperature zones. The Storage Center
should operate in the green zone. The display shows the normal minimum and
maximum temp, and upper and lower critical and warning temperatures.
Audible Alarms
For each audible alarm in the enclosure, displays name, swap detection, status, critical
alarm tone, and if the alarm is muted.
Cooling Fans Sensors

For each blower in the fan module, displays fan status, swap detection, location, and fan
speed code.
Disks
For each disk in the enclosure, displays status, status description, swap detection, any
faults, vendor and product number, port ID, and any bypasses.
IO Modules
For each IO module in the enclosure, displays status, swap detection, physical lane
status, and location.
Power Supplies
For each power supply in the enclosure, displays name, status, swap detection, any
AC/DC failures of voltage irregularities, high temp warning, high temp failures, and
location.
Dell Compellent
223
Chapter 7 Disks
224
System Management
Most often System Management options are selected during initial Storage Center setup
as described in the Storage Center System Manager Setup Guide. However, many of these
options can be modified by using the Storage Management menu.
Contents
Modifying System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Finding Unmanaged Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Using Phone Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Configuring Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Managing System Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Updating Storage Center Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Restarting Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Shutting Down Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Starting Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Viewing Online Storage Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Viewing Background Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Viewing the System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Responding to the Alert Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Monitoring Storage Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Changing the Storage Alert Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Adding Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
User Interface Reference for System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Dell Compellent
225
Chapter 8 System Management
Modifying System Properties

Use these tasks to change system options such as the Storage Center name, RAID stripe
width, and Data Progressions.
Rename the Storage Center

Changing the system name does not have any real effect other than displaying a different
name.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Properties. The System
Properties dialog box appears.
2 Enter a new name in the field next to the Compellent logo.
3 Click OK to save any changes.
226
Set the System Management IP Address

The Management IP Address is used only for dual-controller configurations to run the
System Manager software. This IP address is always connected to the leader. If the leader
fails, the peer takes over the management IP. Thus users can use the same IP address to
access the software even when the normal leader is down.
Note: When using IPv6 addresses, the controller addresses must be set using
IPv6 prior to setting the System Management IP Address.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Properties. The System
Properties dialog box appears.
2 Enter a new Management IP address. Storage Center uses IPv4 format for
Management IP addresses. An IPv6 address may be added, however to use IPv6
format, the controllers must already be set with IPv6 addresses. The IP Prefix Length
is set in the Controller properties.
3 Click OK to save any changes.
See Also
Dell Compellent
227
Select RAID Stripe Width

The default stripe width for Storage Profiles is 10 wide (RAID 6-10). Modifying this value
updates the RAID 6 selections for all Storage Profiles. It also modifies the RAID 6 selections
for user-created Storage Profiles unless Manual Storage Mode is enabled.
In a standard Storage Center, a percentage of most-used data is storage on RAID 10
(striped and mirrored). Data that is used less is stored on RAID 6-10 (which uses an
algorithm to rebuild data if one drive in the logical unit should fail). For RAID 5, the stripe
width determines whether the logical unit is comprised of five or nine drives. For RAID 6,
the stripe width determines whether the logical unit is comprised of six or ten drives.
Distributing data across more drives is marginally more efficient, but increases vulnerability.
Distributing data across fewer drives is less efficient, but marginally decreases vulnerability.
Caution: Do not change the system-wide RAID level if the Storage Center is in
Conservation Mode. Although it would seem logical that changing the RAID level
from fewer drives to more drives would free space, the Storage Center needs
additional space to hold data before restriping it. If you try to change the systemwide RAID level from five or six drives to nine or ten drives, you will run out of free
space sooner. If the Storage Center is in Emergency Mode, you cannot change
RAID level.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Properties.
2 Click the Storage tab. The Storage page appears.
228
For RAID 5, choose between RAID 5-5, which distributes parity across five drives,
or RAID 5-9, which distributes parity across nine drives.
For RAID 6, choose between RAID 6-6, which distributes parity across six drives, or
RAID 6-10, which distributes parity across 10 drives.
About Data Progression

Data Progression is a separately licensed application program. To see if your Storage
Center includes Data Progression, click the Help icon at the top of the main pane.
Data Progression leverages cost and performance differences between storage tiers,
allowing the maximum use of lower-cost drives for stored data, while maintaining highperformance drives for frequently-accessed data. Storage Center automatically creates
tiers based on the disks in your Storage Center. Tier 1 is fastest, Tier 3 the slowest. To view
classes of tiers, select a disk folder. A list of disk types by tier appears.
Schedule Data Progression

Once every 24 hours, Storage Center polls blocks to see if they have been accessed.
Blocks of data are then migrated up or down depending on use. The amount of time the
migration takes depends on the amount of data to be migrated. Use the System
Properties Data Progression tab to set the time at which Data Progression is run.
2 Click the Data Progression tab.
3 Use the up and down arrows to select the time to run Data Progression.
4 To limit the amount of time Data Progression runs, select a run time from the Maximum
Run Time drop down menu.
5 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
229
Determine if Data Progression is Running

When Data Progression is running, volume statistics are not available. View the Statistics
tab for the volume to see if Data Progression is running.
1 In the System Tree, select a volume. General volume properties are displayed in the
main pane.
2 Click the Statistics tab. If Data Progression is running, System Manager informs you
that statistics are not available while Data Progression is in progress.
Stop Data Progression

Follow these steps to stop a Data Progression currently in progress.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume. If the Volume menu displays
the Stop Data Progression option, Data Progression is running.
2 Select Stop Data Progression. Data Progression is stopped.
230
Set System Cache

System cache settings overwrite cache settings for individual volumes. View the settings
on the System Properties Cache tab.
2 Click the Cache tab.
3 Select or clear the Enable Read Cache check box to enable or disable read cache.
Read Cache anticipates the next read and holds it in quick volatile memory, thus
improving read performance.
4 Select or clear the Enable Write Cache to enable or disable the write cache. Write
Cache increases write performance by holding written data in volatile memory until it
can be safely stored on disk.
5 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
231
Configure Global Disk Spares

Set Storage Center spare disk requirements using the Disk Sparing tab in the System
Properties dialog box.
2 Click the Disk Sparing tab.
3 Enter the default number of spares for each storage enclosure. This is the minimum
number of disks to be selected in an enclosure when creating a disk folder before a Hot
Spare is selected.
4 Enter the minimum number of disks for each enclosure before auto-sparing. This is the
number of disks that have to be selected in a Storage Center enclosure before a Hot
Spare is selected.
5 Click OK.
232
Add a Login Message

Add a login message such as a disclaimer, usage guidelines, or user requirements using
the Message tab in the System Properties dialog box.
2 Click the Message tab.
3 Enter the message to appear at login.

4 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
233
Add Optional Information about Storage Center

Add other Storage Center information using the Info tab in the System Properties dialog
box.
3 Enter optional information about the Storage Center.

4 Click OK.
234
Configure Date and Time Settings

The Time Settings dialog box allows you to set the current region and time zone for this
Storage Center or specify the NTP server to which you would like the time to be
synchronized.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Setup Configure Time.
The Time Settings dialog box appears.
2 Select the Region for the Storage Center from the drop-down list.
3 Select the Time Zone for the Storage Center from the drop-down list.
Note: The options you see may vary. If a NTP time server is not available, select
Configure Time Manually to set the date and time.
4 If a NTP server is available:
a Select Use NTP Time Server.
b Enter the IP Address or fully qualified domain name of the time server.
If a NTP time server was previously configured, the Last NTP time server
update field displays the time of the last update.
If a NTP Server has not been entered, the Last NTP time server update field does
not appear.
5 Click OK to save the changes. If a NTP time server is set, Storage Center performs a
test to make sure updates are being received from the time server.
Dell Compellent
235
Configure SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is a protocol for sending email messages between
servers. Storage Center uses SMTP to send automated emails to an administrator account
when management is required.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Setup Configure SMTP.
The Configure SMTP dialog box appears.
2 Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the SMTP mail server in the
SMTP Mail Server field.
3 Enter the IP address or fully-qualified domain name of the backup SMTP mail server in
the Backup SMTP Mail Server field.
4 Click Test server to test the connection(s) to the mail servers.
5 Enter the email address of the sender in the Sender E-mail Address (MAIL FROM)
field, and a common subject line for all emails from Storage Center in the Common
Subject Line field.
6 Enter a Common Subject Line for all emails from Storage Center.
7 Check the Send Extended Hello (EHLO) field to configure use of extended hello for
mail system compatibility. The Send with Hello (HELO) field is grayed out.
When you select Extended Hello mode, instead of beginning the session with the HELO
command, the receiving host issues the EHLO command. If the sending host accepts
this command, the receiving host then sends it a list of SMTP extensions it understands,
and the sending host then knows which SMTP extensions it can use to communicate
with the receiving host.
8 If the email system requires the use of an authorized login, select the Use Authorized
Login (AUTH LOGIN) checkbox and complete the Login ID and Password fields.
9 Click OK.
236
Configure iSNS Server

iSNS is analogous to DNS. Just as DNS provides name service for servers and
workstations in a LAN, an iSNS server provides name service for initiators and targets in a
SAN. This makes the task of managing the storage network easier because data is
centralized on a server.
The iSNS protocol facilitates automated discovery, management, and configuration of
iSCSI and Fibre Channel devices on a TCP/IP network. iSNS provides intelligent storage
discovery and management services comparable to those found in Fibre Channel
networks, allowing a commodity IP network to function in a similar capacity as a storage
area network.
iSNS also facilitates a seamless integration of IP and Fibre Channel networks, due to its
ability to emulate Fibre Channel fabric services, and manage both iSCSI and Fibre Channel
devices. Thereby, iSNS provides value in any storage network comprised of iSCSI devices,
Fibre Channel devices, or any combination thereof.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select
System Setup Configure iSNS Server. The Configure iSNS Server dialog box
appears.
2 Enter the IP address of the iSNS server.

3 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
237
Configure Syslog Server

All syslog messages have a logging facility, which is the location where messages are sent.
The syslog daemon sends messages based on the configured facility. If no facility is
specified, Local0 is the default outgoing facility.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Setup Configure Syslog
Server. The Configure SysLog Server dialog box appears.
2 Enter the IP address of the syslog server in the SysLog Server IP Address field.
3 From the drop-down menu, select the Syslog Facility to where the messages are sent.
4 Click OK.
238
Allow Replications to/from Remote Systems

Enterprise Manager manages data replications between Storage Centers. Use the System
Setup menu to select the option to allow replications to be run.
Note: Replications are managed in Enterprise Manager.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Setup Allow Replications
to/from Remote Systems. The Allow Replications to/from Remote Systems dialog
box appears.
Note: By default, Asynchronous Replication is allowed for all systems.

2 To disallow Asynchronous remote replication, use the drop-down menu to set the
Allowed field to Not Allowed.
3 Click OK to make the change.
Dell Compellent
239
Submit a License
If you add applications, or increase the number of disks licensed for your Storage Center,
you may need to submit a new license. The license is emailed to you from your provider.
Save the license file to a host system.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Setup Submit a License.
2 Browse to the license file location. The file is indicated by a .lic extension.
3 Select the license file. Click Load License. System Manager notifies you if the license
submission was successful.
Add a Controller
The option to add controllers is a separately-licensed feature. Adding controllers increases
fault tolerance and the ability to share the data load across controllers. All controllers in the
dual-controller Storage Center must have the same physical connectivity to servers and
storage enclosures to be able to share workload among them
Caution: All configuration data is lost on the controller being added when the Add
Controller command is accepted by the added controller.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Setup Multi-Controller
Add Controller to System. The Add Controller to System wizard starts.
This page allows you to add a controller to a single controller system. Adding a second
controller to a system adds increased fault tolerance and the ability to divide system
load across both controllers.
To locate the Controller ID and IP Address right click on the system root node in the
Explorer view and select the Properties option.
2 Enter Controller ID, which is the numeric serial number of the controller.
3 Enter a valid IP address in the IP address field for the Ether 0 (MGMT) Interface.
4 If you use a DNS server, enter the IP address of the DNS server in the Primary DNS
Server field.
240
5 (Optional) Add the IP address of a second DNS server in the Secondary DNS Server
field.
7 If everything is accurate, click Join Now. System Manager joins the controller. When
the added controller is joined, Storage Center opens the Startup wizard.
If there are iSCSI HBAs, continue with Configure iSCSI IO Cards on page 255.
If there are no iSCSI HBAs, continue with Configuring Local Ports on page 245.
Rebalance Local Ports

When you add a controller, you must rebalance the local ports so that both controllers are
actively managing data IO.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select
System Setup Multi-Controller Rebalance Ports. The Rebalance Local
Ports wizard starts.
2 Click Continue to begin rebalancing local ports. Access is restricted while the
rebalancing process is in progress.
Dell Compellent
241
Finding Unmanaged Hardware

When System Manager finds unmanaged hardware, the Found Unmanaged Hardware
wizard alerts you to this condition and directs you to the appropriate wizard for the new
hardware.
Manage Unassigned Disks

Use the Found Unmanaged Hardware wizard to manage unassigned disks as described
in these steps.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Find Unmanaged
Hardware. The Found Unmanaged Hardware wizard starts.
Note: To check for unmanaged hardware at startup, select the Check for
unmanaged hardware on startup check box.
2 Click Manage Unassigned Disks.

3 Select the disk folder into which the disk should be placed and click Continue.
4 On the next page, select the disks to be included in the disk folder and click Continue.
5 On the next page, select the disks to be used as hot spares and click Continue.
The next page displays the disk folder, hot spares, and disks in the disk folder you are
modifying or creating, and attributes for each disk. Click Back to cycle through the
previous pages to change hot spares or selected disks.
6 Click Add Disks Now to add the disks to the disk folder.
242
Using Phone Home
Using Phone Home

After installation and setup, initial configuration information for the Storage Center is sent
(Phoned Home) to Dell Technical Support Services.
Note: Phone Home is available to all Storage Center customers, but response time
and assistance is based on the validity and level of your support contract.
Phone Home Immediately

The Phone Home wizard can be used to initiate a Phone Home process and to view
whether a Phone Home process is in progress.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Phone Home Phone
Home. System Manager displays previous Phone Home events.
The State column describes the event status:
Success: Phone Home was successful
Failure: Phone Home could not be completed.
Never Run: Depending upon Storage Center status, some items may not have been
phoned home.
In Progress: Phone Home is currently occurring.
2 (Optional) Select the Include Detailed Logs check box to transfer extra debug logs with
the phone home process.
Note: Use this option only when requested by Dell Technical Support Services.
3 Click Phone Home Now. System Manager informs you that Phone Home is started.
Dell Compellent
243
View the Phone Home Schedule

Use the View menu to see the Phone Home schedule.
From the View menu, select Scheduled Events.
Configure a Phone Home Proxy

If you plan to use a proxy server in your network, configure the Phone Home proxy server
using the Configure Phone Home Proxy wizard.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Phone Home
Configure Phone Home Proxy. The Configure Phone Home Proxy wizard starts.
2 Select the Use Phone Home Proxy Server check box.
3 Enter the IP address of the proxy server, the port, user name, and password to be used
when connecting to the proxy server. Confirm the password.
4 Click OK.
244
Configuring Local Ports

Ports must be configured before you can map volumes to servers. Modifying port
configuration after volumes have been mapped to servers may cause those volumes to go
offline. The operational mode of each transport type may be either Legacy Mode or Virtual
Port Mode. Operational mode is selected for each transport type during initial setup.
The Configure Local Ports wizard simplifies configuration and allows you to configure
Legacy Mode and Virtual Port Mode local ports through a single wizard. From this wizard
you can perform the following functions:
View Current Local Port Configuration on page 245.
Edit a Fault Domain on page 250.
Edit Virtual Ports on page 252.
Reset Default Port Settings on page 253.
View Current Local Port Configuration

Each port on the Storage Center controller is configured by transport type and for either
front end or back end connectivity. The port information presented varies by operational
mode and by transport type.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select SystemSetup
Configure Local Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts. The wizard
displays tabs for each transport type (FC, iSCSI, and SAS) present on the Storage
Center.
2 Click the tab for the transport type you want to view. Information displayed varies based
on transport type and mode.
Dell Compellent
Status: Up or Down.
Slot/Port: Slot and port locations.
Magnifying glass icon: Click to open the Local Port Location dialog box that
displays information about the port and shows a physical view of the IO cards.
Purpose: Values for port purpose vary by transport type and by operational mode.
Fault Domain: Allows you to change the Fault Domain or set to <none>.
245
World Wide Name: Unique identifier that identifies a particular FC, iSCSI, or SAS
target.
User Alias: Allows you to define a descriptive, user-friendly names for physical
ports. The defined name is displayed as the port name in System Manager.
Speed: Displays port speed.
Map Count: Displays the number of volumes that have been mapped to a server.
Modifying port configuration after volumes have been mapped to servers may cause
those volumes to go off-line. Not displayed for SAS ports.
Initiator Count: Number of remote ports with a role of initiator.
Target Count: Number of remote ports with a role of target. For FC and SAS, disks
show up as targets.
Both Count: Number of ports that can both send and receive data, such as a second
Storage Center acting as a server.
Enclosure Connected: Yes or No and is displayed only for FC ports in Virtual Port
and Legacy Modes. Setting the value to Yes prevents the Configure Local Ports
wizard from setting front-end values on FC ports attached to an enclosure.
Slot Type: PCI card type.
Operational Mode: Legacy Mode or Virtual Port Mode.
3 Click Assign Now to save any changes and close the wizard.
246
About Fault Domains (FC and iSCSI only)

Front-end ports are categorized into fault domains that identify allowed port movement
when a controller or port fails. When working with fault domains, you should be aware of
the following concepts.
Dual-controller Legacy Mode

In Legacy Mode, ports are reserved for use in the event of a primary port failure.
Primary ports are designated for data traffic.
Reserved ports assume data load transfer in the event of a failed primary port.
Reserved ports are also used for inter-process communication (IPC) traffic and
Replication.
Fault domains group primary and reserved front-end ports to each other.
Primary and reserved ports are assigned the same fault domain ID (an arbitrary
number) to designate where traffic will be moved in the event of a failover or rebalance.
Virtual Port Mode

In Virtual Port Mode, all ports are available for IO. In the event of a port failure, IO traffic is
routed to an operating port.
A virtual port fault domain value is changed automatically when the preferred physical
port fault domain is changed or when the virtual port is moved to a new preferred
physical port. This greatly simplifies activities such as merging fault domains.
Front-end ports of the same transport type (iSCSI or FC) can be in a single fault domain.
Caution: For iSCSI only, servers initiate IO to iSCSI ports through the fault
domains control port. If an iSCSI port moves to a different fault domain, its
control port will change. This change disrupts any service initiated through the
previous control port. If an iSCSI port moves to a different fault domain, you must
reconfigure the server-side iSCSI initiators before service can be resumed.
Dell Compellent
Although each virtual port is assigned a preferred physical port, in the event of any
failure, a virtual port can fail over to another physical port within the fault domain.
With multi-pathing software on a server, volumes can be mapped to ports in more than
one fault domain. To use multi-pathing, make sure that the server has software, such as
MPIO, to manage multi-pathing.
To reduce network broadcast interference, configure Storage Center Ethernet and

iSCSI ports into a separate VLAN.
247
Create a Fault Domain

Use the Configure Local Ports wizard to create a new fault domain.
Configure Local Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts.
2 Click Edit Fault Domains. The Edit Fault Domains page appears.
3 Click Create Fault Domain.
248
4 Enter a name for the new fault domain.

5 Select a connection type.
8 Click Create Now.
Dell Compellent
249
Edit a Fault Domain

Use the Configure Local Ports wizard to edit fault domains.
3 Select a Fault Domain from the list.

4 Click Edit Fault Domain. The Fault Domain Properties wizard starts.
5 Enter a new domain name and optional notes for the domain.
If the transport type is iSCSI, the Fault Domain Properties this page displays an IP
Settings tab on which you can view and reset the IP address for the control port of the
new iSCSI fault domain, net mask, gateway, and port number
6 Click OK.
250
Delete a Fault Domain

You can only delete a Fault Domain if it is not currently assigned to any ports.
3 Select a Fault Domain from the list.

4 Click Delete Domain. A confirmation prompt appears, or if the fault domain is in use, an
error message appears.
5 If the domain is not in use, click OK to delete the domain. If the domain is in use, exit
the Edit Fault Domains wizard, move affected ports to a different fault domain, and
begin the procedure again.
Dell Compellent
251
Edit Virtual Ports

The Virtual Ports option appears on the first page of the Configure Local Ports wizard only
if the Operational Mode is Virtual Port Mode and the transport type is FC or iSCSI, and
only with a valid license for Virtual Ports. Use this option to modify the preferred physical
port of a virtual port.
When moving a virtual port to a different preferred physical port, the virtual ports fault
domain is automatically changed to reflect the fault domain of the new preferred physical
port.
2 On the first page of the Configure Local Ports wizard, click Edit Virtual Ports. The
next page opens.
3 Scroll to the right side of the page and select the preferred physical port from the dropdown menus.
4 Click Apply Changes to confirm your edits or Return to return to Configure Local
Ports.
5 If the physical port of a virtual port does not match its preferred physical port, Storage
Center controllers are in an Unbalanced state. Right-click on the Controllers node in the
System Tree and select Rebalance Local Ports to open the Rebalance Local Ports
wizard and rebalance the ports.
252
Reset Default Port Settings

Use the Configure Local Ports wizard to reset all port settings to the default values.
Caution: Resetting the port configuration to default settings overrides existing port
configurations and does not attempt to preserve the current connection state of
servers attached to the Storage Center. This process may cause volumes to go offline.
2 Click Reset Defaults to generate the default port configuration for the selected
transport.
If no volumes are currently mapped by transport type, the wizard displays a warning
and prompts you to confirm.
If volumes are currently mapped by transport type, the wizard prompts you to
confirm.
3 Click Yes to reset and No the reject setting local ports back to their default values.
Dell Compellent
253
Convert to Virtual Ports

Before FC local ports can be converted to Virtual Port Mode, support for N_Port ID
Virtualization (NPIV) Mode must be turned on for all front-end FC IO cards. Do this prior to
converting to Virtual Port Mode to allow the FC IO cards to communicate with the switches
and determine if NPIV is supported.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Setup Virtual Ports
Convert to Virtual Ports NPIV Mode On All FC IO Cards Turn On NVIP Mode.
A dialog box appears asking you to confirm turning on NPIV Mode for front-end FC IO
cards.
2 Click Yes.
3 From the Storage Management menu, select System Setup VIrtual Ports
Convert to Virtual Ports. The Convert to Virtual Ports wizard starts.
4 Select the transport types (FC or iSCSI) to convert to Virtual Ports.

Note: By default, all transport types are selected.
5 Click Continue. The Storage Center checks to see if the selected transport types are
eligible for converting.
254
If the conversion pre-check finds errors, an error message explaining the error is
returned and the conversion process is canceled.
If no errors are found, a confirmation message is returned and the conversation

process begins.
Configure iSCSI IO Cards

All iSCSI IO cards must be assigned static IP address, subnet mask, and gateway values
before the IO cards can be used. The Configure iSCSI IO Cards wizard simplifies iSCSI
IO card configuration by allowing you to configure cards through a single screen.
If iSCSI cards were not configured as part of initial setup, use the wizard to configure both
initialized and initialized cards.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Setup
Configure iSCSI IO Cards. The Configure iSCSI IO Cards wizard starts.
Note: Uninitialized cards display an IP Address of 0.0.0.0.

2 Enter IP address, subnet mask, and gateway values for all IO cards.
3 Click Save Configuration to configure the iSCSI IO card.
A progress page appears showing configuration and port refresh progress. If any IO
cards have not been configured, a warning message is displayed. Select Yes to leave
the IO cards uninitialized.
4 When configuration is complete, the wizard closes automatically.
Dell Compellent
255
Add iSCSI Remote Connections

Use the Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections wizard to set up IP addresses for
remote connections.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Setup
Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections.
The Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections wizard starts by asking if Network
Address Translation (NAT) has been configured between the local Storage Center and
the remote Storage Center.
Click Yes if NAT is configured between the local Storage Center and the remote
Storage Center. The next page of the wizard allows you to enter the required NATed
IP addresses and iSCSI names for each iSCSI IO card in the remote Storage Center.
Note: Storage Center does not support Remote iSCSI Compellent Connections
with NATed IP Addresses when either machine is running in Virtual Port mode.
Click No if NAT is not configured between the local Storage Center and the remote
Storage Center. The next page of the wizard allows you to enter the IP addresses.
2 Enter the required information and click Continue. The remote connections are added.
256
Managing System Access

IP filtering creates access control lists either by user type or by a specific user. If you use
IP filtering, you must use it to control all Storage Center access. IP filtering creates an Allow
Access Control List. If there is no specific allow rule, access is denied.
By default, IP filtering is off, implying an Allow Any rule. After you create an IP filter, Storage
Center infers that no one has access except for the specific access granted in the IP filter.
Make sure that the IP filters grant sufficient access to all System Manager users.
Caution: Be careful when configuring IP Filters. If an IP Filter does not permit
access to Admin users, it is possible to lock yourself out.
If you use network address translation (NAT), be sure to specify the IP address that is seen
by Storage Center. The address is not necessarily the same as the local IP address of the
machine you use to access the Storage Center. In this case, the wizard will not be able to
determine if an Access IP Filter exists for the current User Name and IP Address.
Access menu options allow you to:
Dell Compellent
Create IP Filter for Current User on page 258
Create an IP Filter on page 259.
Configure the SNMP Server on page 262.
Configure a Secure Console on page 263.
Generate a New SSL Certificate on page 263.
Reset the License Acceptance on page 265.
257
Create IP Filter for Current User

Use this option to create an IP Filter for the current login and IP address. Changes take
affect at the next login.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Access IP Filtering
Manage IP Filters. The Manage IP Filters wizard starts.
System Manager notifies you if there is no filter for the current user name and IP
address and warns you that you must include this information to have access at the next
login.
2 Click Create Filter for this User on the first page of the Manage IP Filters wizard. A
summary showing the IP filter that will be created for the current user name and IP
address appears.
If you are using Network Address Translation (NAT), warnings appear cautioning you to
use the address that is seen by the Storage Center
3 After you have double checked all information, click Create Now to create the access
rule filter.
258
Create an IP Filter
Use this option to create an IP Filter for a specific user or for all users. Changes take affect
at the next login.
2 Click Create IP Filter. A dialog box appears that allows you to set a privilege level for a
group of users or for a specific user.
3 Choose from the following:
Click User Privilege Level to select a privilege level for all users.
Click Specific User to select a privilege level for a specific user.
4 Click Continue. The next page that appears allows you to select a single host, an IP
address, or a range of IP addresses for the filter.
Dell Compellent
259
5 Make a selection for the IP filter. If single or range is selected, enter the associated IP
address or range of IP addresses for the filter.
6 Click Continue. A summary appears showing the attributes of the filter you are about
to create.
7 Click Create Now to finish creating the filter. A confirmation page appears displaying all
current IP filter(s) including the newly created filter.
8 Click New Filter to create another filter, or click Close to finish.
260
Modify an IP Filter
Use this option to change an IP Filter. Changes take affect at the next login.
2 Click View Existing Filters. A dialog box appears listing the current filters.
3 Select a filter from the list, and select Modify Filter.
4 Modify the filter by selecting the user privilege level or the specific user, in the same way
as for Create an IP Filter on page 259.
5 Click Continue. The IP address page appears.
6 Enter the IP address or the range of addresses. If a modification would disallow all
access for the current user name and IP address, a warning message appears.
7 Verify all information and click Continue. A summary appears showing the attributes of
the filter you are about to create.
8 Click Create Now to finish creating the filter. A confirmation page appears displaying all
current IP filter(s) including the newly created filter.
9 Click Close to finish.
Delete an IP Filter
Use this option to delete an IP Filter. Do not delete an IP filter that provides access for the
current user ID and IP address.
2 Click View Existing Filters. A dialog box appears listing the current filters.
3 Select a filter from the list, and select Delete Filter. If deletion of the selected filter would
disallow all access for the current user name and IP address, a warning message
appears.
4 Click Continue to delete the filter.
5 Click Close to finish.
Dell Compellent
261
View Access Violations

This report displays records of access failures to this Storage Center.
Access Violation Viewer. The Access Failures dialog box appears, which reports
failures by:
User Name
IP Address
Time
2 To remove an entry, select it from the list and click Remove.
Configure the SNMP Server

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) protocol monitors the Storage Center
over the network.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Access
Configure SNMP Server. The Configure SNMP Server dialog box appears.
2 Enter a Read Only Community String.
Enter a password used to allow Network Management Systems to read from the SNMP
agent.
3 Enter a Read Write Community String.
Enter a password used to allow Network Management Systems to read from or write to
the SNMP agent.
4 Click Start Agent. The agent needs to be running for external SNMP-enabled devices
to communicate with the SNMP Agent.
5 Enter Trap Community String.
Enter a password used to allow SNMP agent to communicate with the Network
Management System.
6 Enter a Trap Destination.
Enter the IP address of the Network Management System that is collecting trap
information.
7 Enter Trap Port.
Enter the port number of the Network Management System.
8 Select a Trap Type from the drop-down menu.
The trap type is used by the SNMP Agent to send trap data from the Network
Management System.
9 Select or clear the Enable Deprecated Traps check box.
This option is typically not enabled. Selecting this option causes the Storage Center
SNMP Agent to send deprecated traps (organized by severity), as well as the more
recently defined traps (organized by function).
10 Click Start Trap.
11 Click OK.
262
Configure a Secure Console

A secure console allows support personnel to access a Storage Center console using SSH
without connecting through the serial port.
Note: Do not modify the secure console configuration without the assistance of Dell
Technical Support Services.
A machine used as a proxy server for Phone Home cannot be dependent upon
Storage Center itself. If a proxy server is dependent on Storage Center, the machine
cannot Phone Home or connect through SSH as it is booting.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select SystemAccessConfigure Secure
Console. System Manager warns you not to modify the secure console without the
assistance of Dell Technical Support Services.
2 If you are being assisted by Dell Technical Support Services, click Continue. The
Configure Secure Console wizard starts.
3 For additional information, contact Dell Technical Support Services.
Disable Secure Console Access

If secure console access was enabled through the Configure Secure Console wizard,
options to restart or disable secure console access to the Storage Center are available on
the Storage Management System Access menu.
From the Storage Management menu, select System Access Disable Secure
Console.
Restart Secure Console Access

If secure console access was enabled through the Configure Secure Console wizard,
options to restart or disable secure console access to the Storage Center are available on
the Storage Management System Access menu.
From the Storage Management menu, select System Access Restart Secure
Console.
Generate a New SSL Certificate

The SSL certificate must match the Storage Center's IP Address or DNS host name. The
initial certificate shipped with the Storage Center will have a common name that may not
match the IP address or DNS host name assigned to the Storage Center. If this is the case,
when connecting to Storage Center, a message will be displayed identifying a mismatch
between the IP address or DNS host name in the certificate and the IP address or DNS host
name of the Storage Center. Import the correct certificate or generate a new certificate to
correct this.
Generate SSL at Startup

If prompted, enter the IP Address or DNS name of Storage Center as you refer to it in your
browser. You may include a list of names and IP addresses separated by commas. The first
name will become the Common Name, and the rest of the names will become
subjectAltNames in the certificate. Storage Center generates a new certificate set with
this IP Address or DNS name, correcting the mismatch. This command closes the current
connection. You must log on again after the new certificate is generated.
Dell Compellent
263
Import an Existing Certificate

Use the Generate New SSL Certificate wizard to import an existing certificate. The existing
certificate must be a public key file (*.pem) file and must be in x.509 format
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Access Manage SSL
Certificate. The Manage SSL Certificate wizard starts.
2 Click Import.
3 Navigate to and select the existing public key (*.pem) file. The public key file must be in
x.509 format.
4 Click Next.
5 Navigate to and select the existing private key file (*.pem).
6 Click Next. A summary page appears that identifies the key files selected.
7 Click Save to import the certificates.
264
Generate SSL Using System Manager

Use the Generate New SSL Certificate wizard to generate a new certificate.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Access Manage SSL
Certificate. The Manage SSL Certificate wizard starts.
Caution: Generating a new certificate will close the current connection. You will
have to close your web browser windows to continue.
2 Click Generate to create and install the new certificates.
3 Enter the IP Address or DNS name of Storage Center as you refer to it in your browser.
You may include a list of names and IP addresses separated by commas. The first name
will become the Common Name, and the rest of the names will become
subjectAltNames in the certificate.
4 Click Generate Now. Storage Center generates a new certificate set with this IP
Address or DNS name, correcting the mismatch. This command closes the current
connection. You must log on again after the new certificate is generated.
Reset the License Acceptance

Follow these steps to reset the license acceptance.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Access
Reset License Acceptance. The Reset License Acceptance dialog box opens.
2 Click Yes (Reset Now).
Dell Compellent
265
Updating Storage Center Software

Storage Center updates are bundled together as a single downloadable update package.
An update package includes the latest updates for the following Storage Center software
and firmware:
Storage Center System Manager software
Storage Center firmware
Enclosure firmware
Disk firmware
Types of Components
Within an update package, an individual update component is classified by how the update
component can be installed.
Required or Deferrable: Required components must be installed as part of the update.

Deferrable components can be installed at a later time.
Service Affecting or Service Optional: Service Affecting components can be installed

only when the Storage Center is temporarily taken out-of-service. Service Optional
components can be installed either when the Storage Center is in service or during a
scheduled outage.
The following table shows which components affect service during installation.
Service Affecting
Service Optional
Storage Center with a Single Controller

Storage Center Firmware Update
Yes
Enclosure Firmware Update
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Depending on the components for a specific

release, enclosure firmware may or may not be
Service Optional.
Disk Firmware Update
Disk firmware upgrades may be service affecting
or non-service affecting depending on the drive.
A drive that supports an in-service upgrade, is a
drive that can:
266
Process IOs and other commands while

receiving firmware blocks.
Boot and ready new firmware in three

seconds.
Service Affecting
Service Optional
Storage Center with Dual Controllers

Storage Center Firmware Update
Enclosure Firmware Update
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Depending on the components for a specific

release, enclosure firmware may or may not be
Service Optional.
Disk Firmware Update
Disk firmware upgrades may be service affecting
or non-service affecting depending on the drive.
A drive that supports an in-service upgrade, is a
drive that can:
Dell Compellent
Process IOs and other commands while

receiving firmware blocks.
Boot and ready new firmware in three

seconds.
267
Check for an Update Package

By default, a new Storage Center is configured to automatically check for update packages.
An upgraded Storage Center retains the existing configuration setting for automatic
updates. However, you can manually check for updates by using the Check for Updates
menu option.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Update
Check for Update.
2 Click Check Now.
When Storage Center is finished checking for updates, the system displays the current
status of the update process. It also provides links to all the operations needed to check
for, download, verify, and install Storage Center updates. The links provided depend
upon the status of the update process.
Update Status Messages

The following table for provides details on possible messages in Update Status display.
268
Field
Description
Current Update Status
Current status of the Check Update, Download Update, or Install

Update process:
Checking for Update: Storage Center is currently checking for

updates.
Controller Down: A controller is down. Installation cannot

proceed when a controller is down.
Downloading Update: Storage Center is currently

downloading an update.
Error Checking or Downloading: An error occurred during

Check Update or Download Update.
Error Installing Update: An error occurred while installing an

update component. Click Install Report to view details on the
installation error.
Installing Update: Storage Center is currently installing an

update.
No Updates Available: Last Check Update process found no

available updates. Click Check Now to check again for
updates.
Update Available for Download: An update is available for

download. Click Download Now to download the update.
Update Ready to Install: A downloaded update is ready to

install. Click Install Update to install the update.
Validating Components: Storage Center is currently verifying

each component status to determine if a component is ready for
installation.
Current Package Version
OS version currently running on the Storage Center.
New Package Version
Version of the OS ready to download or install.
Field
Description
Service Affecting
Indicates whether package installation affects Storage Center

service:
Controller Reset
Yes: Package installation affects Storage Center service.
No: Package installation does not affect Storage Center

service.
Deferrable: Package contains service-affecting components

that can be installed at a later time.
Indicates whether the update package installation requires

rebooting the controllers:
For a single-controller Storage Center: rebooting the controller

always affects service.
For a clustered-controller Storage Center: If the upgrade is

service-affecting, the controllers are rebooted simultaneously. If
the upgrade is not service-affecting, the controllers are
rebooted in sequence.
Last Check Time
Shows the date and time when Storage Center last successfully
checked for updates.
Validation Errors
Shows the number of validation warnings or errors, if any,

encountered during a Validate update process.
Installation Errors
Shows the number of installation errors and warnings, if any, that

occurred during installation.
Update Status Actions

Depending on the reported status, the following buttons appear:
Click
To
Check Now
Check for updates.
Validate Components
Validate update components.
Install Update
Install the downloaded update package.
Details
View details for a downloaded update package.
See Also
Configure Automatic Updates on page 270
Dell Compellent
269
Manually Download an Available Update

You can check for and download software updates at any time.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Update Update Status.
The Update Status wizard starts.
2 Depending on the status of the currently software, you can:
Click Download Now. To download the latest update software package. As Storage
Center downloads the update, status appears in the Update Status wizard.
Select Check Now to check for updates. When Storage Center is finished checking
for updates, the results are displayed in the Update Status dialog box.
Configure Automatic Updates

You can set up Storage Center to automatically download software updates.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Update
Configure Automatic Updates. The Configure Automatic Updates wizard starts.
2 Select the update option:
Do not automatically check for software updates: Select this option to disable
automatic checking for updates.
Notify me of a software update but do not download automatically: Select to

automatically check for updates and receive notification when an update is available.
Updates are not downloaded until you explicitly download the update.
Download software updates automatically and notify me: Select to automatically

download updates and receive notification when the download is complete.
Never check for software updates (Phone Home not available): Select to prevent
System Manager from ever checking for updates either automatically or manually.
This option is for secure sites at which Phone Home is not available.
3 Click OK.
270
View Update Package Details

When a downloaded update package is ready to install, you can view details for the
package prior to installing the package.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Update Update Status.
2 Click Details. The Update Details page appears.
The Update Details page provide details for all components included in the update
package.
Column
Description
Component
Name of component to be updated.
Type
Storage Center: Component updates Storage Center software.
Enclosure: Component updates enclosure firmware.
Disk: Component updates disk firmware.
Version
Version number of the update component.
Status
Status of the component update:
Ready for Update: Component is ready for update.
Installed: Component has been installed.
Update Count
Number of components on the Storage Center to which the update

component applies. For example, for a controller firmware update,
shows 1 for a single-controller Storage Center and 2 for a dualcontroller Storage Center.
Update Type
Indicates whether the installation of the update component is

required or deferrable:
Message
Dell Compellent
Type of component to be updated:
Required: Update must be applied.
Deferrable Service Affecting: Update is deferrable and

applying the update affects service on all systems. Schedule a
service outage to apply the update.
Deferrable Service Optional: Update is deferrable and applying

the update can be done either without affecting service or during
a scheduled service outage.
Shows information messages, if any, that further describe the update

component.
271
Decide How to Apply Updates

Within an update package, an individual update component is classified by how the update
component can be installed.
1 After downloading an update packages, view the Update Details:
a From the Storage Management menu, select System Update Update Status.
b Click Details. The Update Details page appears.
2 On the Update Details page, view the Update Type column for each component:
For this Update Type Apply Update Options Include
Required
Deferrable Service Affecting
Component must be installed.
For a single-controller Storage Center, the update

component affects service.
For a dual-controller Storage Center, the update component

can be performed without disruption of service.
Component installation can be deferred.

Applying the update affects service on all Storage Centers.
Schedule a service outage to apply the update.
Deferrable Service Optional
Component installation can be deferred.

Applying the update can be done either without affecting service
or during a scheduled service outage.
3 After viewing the Update Type for all components included in the update package,
determine how to apply the updates:
If you intend to install components that affect service, plan for and schedule a service
outage during which to apply the updates. You may also want to install components
that are service optional during the schedule outage.
If you intend to install components that do not affect service, plan for applying the
updates during a time at which the Storage Center is least busy.
Before installing an upgrade, you should be aware of the following:
The installation process automatically reboots Storage Center controller(s) when

required by the components being updated.
Disk firmware, when applied in-service, does not require a system boot.
For dual-controller Storage Centers, installation reboots the controllers in sequence or

simultaneously, depending on the components being updated. A service outage is
required when controllers are rebooted simultaneously.
Note: Do not manually restart the Storage Center controllers during the upgrade
process. Upgrading is a software-controlled process.
272
Restarting Storage Center
Restarting Storage Center

These steps describe how to restart a controller using the System Manager. Use this
method to restart controllers without shutting down the entire Storage Center.
1 From the from the Storage Management menu, select System Shutdown/Restart.
2 For a dual-controller configuration, select Restart in Sequence or Restart
Simultaneously.
Restart in Sequence does not cause an outage. System Manager shuts down the
first controller, and then restarts the first controller. When the first controller is up,
System Manager shuts down and restarts the second controller. When both
controllers are running again, ports are unbalanced and System Manager asks you
to re-balance the ports.
Restart Simultaneously shuts both controllers down simultaneously and then

brings them back on line. This causes an outage. When the controllers are restarted,
they may or may not be unbalanced.
3 Click OK.
Note: If the controllers fail to power down, hold down the physical power button on
the front of the controller until it powers off (approximately 8 seconds).
Dell Compellent
273
Shutting Down Storage Center

Shutting down a Storage Center creates a system outage, during which time no IO is
processed. Always halt all IO to the controllers before shutting down a Storage Center. Use
this process only as directed, for example to replace hardware, to move the Storage Center
to another location, or to shut down for data center power maintenance. Storage Center
should be always be shut down in an orderly process by turning off controllers and all
associated components in the order described in this section.
Prepare to Shut Down Storage Center

Before shutting down Storage Center hardware, Phone Home current information, disable
cache settings, and stop all IO as described in these steps.
1 Phone Home to Dell Technical Support Services.
a From the Storage Management menu, select System Phone Home Phone
Home. The System Manager displays previous Phone Home events.
b Click Phone Home Now. The Phone Home wizard starts.
c Click OK. For each item being sent, the Phone Home wizard shows the status of In
Progress. Once completed, this status changes to Success if the Phone Home has
completed successfully, or Failure if the Phone Home could not be completed.
d When all items have been sent successfully, click Close.
2 Disable the global system cache settings to flush all cached data to disk.
a From the Storage Management menu, select System Properties.
b Click the Cache tab.
c Clear the Enable Read Cache and Enable Write Cache check boxes
d Click OK.
3 Shut down all attached servers so that all IO is completely stopped.
See Also
Set System Cache on page 231
Using Phone Home on page 243
274
Shutting Down Storage Center
Shut Down Controllers

Use the System Manager to shut down controllers in the Storage Center.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Shutdown/Restart. The
Shutdown/Restart wizard starts.
2 Select Shutdown from the drop-down menu.

3 Click OK. Both controllers shut down, causing a system outage.
Note: If the controllers do not shut down, press and hold the power button on the
front of each controller unit they turn off (about five seconds).
Shut Down Enclosures

Each enclosure has two power supplies, which must physically be turned off.
Press each power switch on the rear of the enclosure. When possible, turn off the power
supplies simultaneously.
Dell Compellent
275
Starting Storage Center

These steps describe how to start a Storage Center that has been completely shut down.
Turn on Enclosures
Turn on each enclosure attached to the Storage Center and allow the disks to spin up to full
speed before turning on other enclosures and the controllers.
1 Simultaneously press both power switches on the rear of the enclosure to turn on the
enclosure.
2 Repeat with each enclosure attached to the Storage Center, waiting for the disks to spin
up between enclosures.
Turn on Controllers
Turn on each controller and then log on System Manager to finish the controller start up
process.
Prerequisites
Make sure that all disks are up and spinning at full speed before turning on any controllers.
Steps
1 Turn on each controller by pressing and holding the power button on the front of the
controller. The fans turn on as an indication that the controller is starting to come up.
2 After the controllers have finished booting, log on to the Storage Center using System
Manager.
3 For dual-controller systems, respond Yes to the prompt to rebalance local ports. If the
prompt does not appear, follow these steps to rebalance local ports.
a Right-click on the Controllers node in the System Tree and select Rebalance Local
Ports. The Rebalance Local Ports wizard starts.
b Click Continue to begin rebalancing local ports.
Finish Startup
After the controllers are running and ports are balanced, reset the cache settings, resume
IO, and finish by Phoning Home.
1 Enable the global system cache settings.
a From the Storage Management menu, select System Properties.
b Click the Cache tab.
c Select both Enable Read Cache and Enable Write Cache check boxes.
d Click OK.
2 Resume IO by turning on all servers that use the Storage Center.
3 Make sure all hosts are back online and verify all volumes are mapped to the Storage
Center.
4 Phone Home from Storage Center to Dell Technical Support Services.
276
Viewing Online Storage Summary

The Online Storage tab displays various storage summaries, trends, and reports.
View Available Storage Summary

The Available Storage Summary tab displays disk space usage for each disk folder.
1 From the Storage Center View menu, select Online Storage.
2 Select Available Storage Summary. The Available Storage Summary is displayed in
the main pane.
Dell Compellent
Field
Description
Status
Indication if you need to add storage may be Normal or Disk

Low.
Total disk space
Total space for each disk folder. Generally there is only one disk
folder. Total Disk Space displays the sum of all disk drives in each
disk folder. A disk folder is a logical grouping of physical drives
with similar page sizes and redundancy. Disk folders can contain
a mixture of drive types, capacities, and speeds. The total
capacity of the disk folder is the sum of the capacities of the
drives within the folder. Disk folders also contain spare drives,
reserved to replaced a failed drive. Because space on a spare
drive is not used until another drive fails, its capacity is not
included in the total capacity for the disk folder.
Total space allocated for

volume use
Total space minus overhead.
Allocated space used by

volumes
Storage Center allocates disk space based upon the

configurations and IO patterns of each volume. As more space is
used, Storage Center allocates additional space. When Storage
Center has no more space to allocate, it sends an alert.
277
Field
Description
Free allocated space
Storage Center allocates disk space based on the configurations

and IO patterns of each volume. As more space is used, Storage
Center allocates additional space. When Storage Center has no
more space to allocate, it sends an alert.
Unallocated disk space
Space not allocated, not used.
Total free space
Total of Free allocated space and Unallocated disk space.
Space reserved by system
Space reserved for system overhead.
Unhealthy/Bad disk space
Number of unusable bad disk sectors on disks, if any.
Spares and space available
Number and capacity of spares, if any.
Number of unmanaged disks Number of unmanaged disks, if any.
278
View Storage Consumption Trends

The Storage Consumption Trends report displays the history of storage consumption for
each disk folder and each class of disk. The trends indicate which disks are getting
increased use. Storage trends by disk class can help you decide which disks to add if a
Storage Center needs additional space.
1 From the View menu, select Online Storage.
2 Click the Storage Consumption Trends tab. The Storage Consumption Trends are
displayed in the main pane, showing consumption by disk folder and disk class.
Dell Compellent
279
View Data Progression Pressure Reports

Use the Data Progression Pressure Report to make decisions about the types of disks to
add to a Storage Center. For each storage type, the Data Progression Pressure Reports
displays how space is allocated and consumed across different RAID types and storage
tiers.
By default, Storage Center using Data Progression gradually migrates data down from
high-end drives to be stored on low-end drives. If a disk class is full, Storage Center writes
data to the next lower class. Using Storage Profiles, you can create volumes that reside
only on one disk class. For example, a volume that contains only Replays might be stored
on a lower disk tier.
Data Progression Pressure Reports can display data from the previous 30 days so that
you can see how Data Progression has moved data between RAID types and disk tiers.
2 Click the Data Progression Pressure Reports tab.
3 Select a date and time in the Sample Time drown-down menu.
The Data Progression Pressure Report displays:
Space available in a disk folder. Disk folders cannot share space.
Space allocated to this type of storage.
Total space allocated across all types of storage.
For each tier, the Data Progression Pressure Report displays:
280
Space available in tier.
Space allocated to this type of storage.
Total space allocated from this tier across all types of storage.
Click on a column head to sort data in that column. Within each tier, the Data Progression
Pressure Report information includes:
Dell Compellent
Field
Description
RAID Level
Level in the tier.
Track
Type of track may be Fast or Standard.
Chart
Bar chart displaying allocated space and space consumed.
Disk Allocated
Space reserved for volumes.
Disk Used
From the amount allocated, the amount that is in use by volumes.
Moving Up
In the next Data Progression cycle, the amount that will be moved up.
Indicated in the bar chart by a green bar and up arrow.
Moving Down
In the next data progression cycle, the amount that will be moved
down. Indicated in the bar chart by an orange bar and a down arrow.
Volume Allocated
Amount of space presented for the use by volumes after RAID is

applied.
Volume Used
Amount of space used by volumes after RAID is applied.
Saved as RAID 10
Amount of space saved by moving less-accessed data to RAID 5

rather than using RAID 10 for all data.
281
View Volume Distribution Reports

Volume Distribution Reports display the amount of storage space each volume is
consuming. Information includes space allocated for a volume and the amount of space
actually consumed. The volume distribution report can help you recover space by
identifying logical and physical space.
2 Click the Volume Distribution Report tab. The Volume Distribution Report is
displayed in the main pane.
The Volume Distribution Report displays logical space consumed by a volume and
additional space this volume is consuming because of the existence of Replays. It details
growth rate trends for both the volume and the associated Replays. Because Replays
contain information about changes that occurred on a volume over time, they take up
space. For example, a volume and all of its Replays might consume 10 GB of space. If all
the Replays were expired, the volume would only consume 8 GB of space. In this case, the
Replay overhead is 2 GB.
In addition, the Online Storage view also has reports for:
282
Available Storage Summary
Storage Consumption Trends
Data Progression Pressure Reports
Viewing Background Processes
Viewing Background Processes

Many Storage Center tasks, such as Replications, run as background processes. Monitor
and manage these processes from the Background Processes view.
From the View menu, select Background Processes. Background processes information
appears.
Viewing the System Log

The System Log is a record of all status messages from the Storage Center.
1 From the View menu, select System Log. The Filter Log Messages wizard starts.
2 Use the drop-down menus to filter the content of the log to be retrieved. Select from the
following:
Date and time between which to view logs
Message level greater than, lesser than, or equal to a warning, configuration, or

debug
In a clustered-controller configuration, name of controller
Subsystem
3 Select or clear the check box to display system-level messages.

4 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
283
Responding to the Alert Monitor

Alerts warn you when Storage Center requires attention. The current status of the Storage
Center is indicated by the color of the System Status icon in the top-right corner of System
Manager.
Alert Indicators
Alerts occur in various types depending upon the area of the Storage Center affected. The
type of the alert is indicated by the icon that appears before the alert message.
Red (Critical):
The System Status icon is red when an alert exists that has a status
of Down, Critical, or Emergency. When the System Status icon is red, this indicates
a condition that requires immediate attention.
Yellow (Warning):
The System Status icon is yellow when an alert exists that has a
status of Degraded or Unavailable. This indicates a condition of which you should be
aware, but which does not require immediate attention.
Green (Normal):
The System Status icon is green when no alerts exist, when the
only alerts that exist are to inform you. The System Status icon returns to green when
all alerts higher than Inform are acknowledged.
Alert Categories
Alert
Description
Alert
This category contains normal alerts. These alerts represent current issues present
on the Storage Center. They are also being actively monitored and will clear
themselves automatically should the situation that has caused them corrects itself.
After an alert of this type becomes cleared, a record that it occurred can be found
under the Alert History category.
History
This category contains a history of the normal alerts that appeared and were
cleared automatically. This category exists to allow you to keep a record of any past
conditions that have occurred on the Storage Center.
Indication
This category contains alerts that are for informational purposes only. These alerts
exist to warn you about a condition on the Storage Center that may require direct
user intervention to correct.
Maintenance
This category contains any alerts that occur while the Storage Center's Operation
Mode is set to Install, Maintenance, or PreProduction. This category exists to isolate
these alerts from alerts that occur during normal operation.
Alert Status
284
Status
Description
Complete
Indicates that an operation on the Storage Center has completed.
Critical
Indicates an item on the Storage Center is in a critical state and may be nearing
failure.
Degraded
Indicates an item on the Storage Center is currently operating in a degraded

mode. Items in this condition may operate in degraded mode indefinitely, but are
not functioning to their full capability.
Down
Indicates an item on the Storage Center is down and not currently operational.
Responding to the Alert Monitor
Status
Description
Emergency
Indicates an item on the Storage Center requires immediate attention in order to

remain operational.
Inform
Provide information regarding some operation that is occurring or has occurred

on the Storage Center.
Unavailable
Indicates that an item on the Storage Center that is expected to be present cannot
currently be found for use.
View the System Alert Monitor

The Alert Monitor opens in a separate tab in the main window.
1 Click System Status at the top of the System Explorer. The Alert Monitor view
appears.
2 Expand the Alerts folder to view all alerts.
3 Select an alert to display additional information about the message. The shortcut menu
displays additional commands for the alert.
For example, Show displays the object. Some alerts do not have a related object to
be shown. For these alerts, the Object column is blank.
To acknowledge an alert, select Acknowledge. Acknowledging an alert

acknowledges it for all users.
Properties displays additional information. Click the Advanced tab in Alert

Properties to display a reference number. The reference number may be important
for communication with Dell Technical Support Services.
Acknowledged Alerts
Alerts in the Alert and Maintenance categories can be acknowledged to indicate to the
Storage Center that you have read the alert message and are aware of the problem. After
all alerts have been acknowledged, the System Status icon returns to the green (normal)
state until additional alerts occur.
Alert Deletion
Alerts in the Indication and Alert History categories can be deleted. After an alert is
deleted, it cannot be recovered.
Dell Compellent
285
Finding More Information About an Alert

Many alerts are associated with items that can be monitored in other areas of the System
Manager software. These items are displayed in the Object column. To see more
information about one of these objects, select the alert and then select the Show button in
the Alert Monitor toolbar.
Space Warnings
If remaining free disk space reaches 32 GB or less, Storage Center begins a series of steps
to conserve space, to alert you of the status, and to finally enter emergency mode if disk
space is not added.
Conservation Mode
Storage Center enters Conservation Mode when remaining free space reaches 32 GB (or
less for systems smaller than 3.2 TB). When Storage Center enters Conservation Mode,
System Manager generates a Conservation Mode Alert to inform you that the no new
volumes can be created and that it will begin to aggressively expire Replays. The
Conservation Alert is close to the boundary where space is exhausted to keep these
actions from being performed unless necessary. Because of its proximity to the emergency
threshold, it is not a tool to manage storage, and should not be used to plan adding disks
to the Storage Center.
Emergency Mode
Storage Center enters Emergency Mode when the system can no longer operate because
there is no more free space. In Emergency Mode, System Manager responds with the
following actions.
Generates an Emergency alert.
Expires Replays early.
Prevents new volume creation.
Restricts write IO to pages already allocated; that is, only re-writes of existing data are
allowed.
To support recovery efforts, these functions remain available:
Volumes remain visible as read-only.
Volumes can respond to Space Recovery requests from the server or Enterprise
Manager to release unused blocks of data.
Caution: Because Emergency Mode prevents all server IO outside of existing data
updates, Emergency Mode is service affecting. Administrators must take special
care to continually monitor free space on the Storage Center and add space when
needed to avoid reaching the Emergency Mode threshold.
286
Monitoring Storage Space
Monitoring Storage Space

Storage Center sends an alert when additional space is required. The Storage Center:
Automatically monitors the amount of space used and the amount of space remaining
on a Storage Center, both as a percentage of space and an absolute value
Automatically allocates disk space for volumes to use as needed
Notifies you when remaining free space falls below the Storage Alert Threshold
Storage Center groups all disks in a managed Disk Folder into one common pool of
storage. Volumes draw space from the common pool. Each volume simultaneously uses all
of the disk drives in the shared storage pool for improved data access rates.
Servers
Volumes
Managed Disk Folder pool of storage
An exception to the efficient pool of storage is created when disks are assigned to a second
managed disk folder or volumes are created with non-standard datapage sizes or
redundancy. To take full advantage of Dynamic Capacity, assign all disks to one managed
disk folder using standard storage type volumes.
Space is allocated from the shared storage pool as new volumes are created, additional
data is stored on volumes, and Replays are taken and stored.
Dell Compellent
287
Changing the Storage Alert Threshold

The Low Space Threshold is the percentage of available storage below which System
Manager alerts you to add more disks. By default, the Storage Alert Threshold is set at
10% of available storage.
Storage Center allocates disk space from a disk folder for volume and replay use as needed
based upon the configurations and IO patterns of each volume. As the Storage Center
approaches the end of the disk space available within the disk folder, you are notified of the
possibility that you could run out of space. This notification indicates that you are in a Space
Low state. The notification occurs when space available falls below the Storage Alert
Threshold.
1 From an assigned disk folder shortcut menu, select Properties. (Your assigned disk
folder may have a different name.) The Disk Folder Properties dialog box appears.
2 Select a Storage Alert Threshold from the drop-down menu. If available storage space
falls below this number, an alert is generated to warn you that space is low.
288
Adding Space
Adding Space
The long term solution for increasing available space is to add disks to Storage Center. The
list below includes additional actions for recovering unused disk space.
Adding Disks
The solution to insufficient storage is to add disks or enclosures.
After disks are added, the space may not be immediately available. Make sure that you
allow enough time for the System Manager to prepare disks to be used to store data.
Deleting Unused Volumes

Delete unused volumes. (An unused volume is not an empty volume.)
Emptying the Recycle Bin

Make sure that the Recycle Bin is empty. Space from deleted volumes is not recovered
until the Recycle Bin is empty. Select the Recycle Bin. From the shortcut menu, select
Empty Recycle Bin.
Expiring Replays
Expire Replays that are not needed. Select each volume separately, and expire Replays
from the Replay tab.
Using the Enterprise Manager Server Agent Space Recovery Program

The Enterprise Manager Server Agent Space Recovery program finds and recovers
unused disk space. For more information, see the Enterprise Manager User Guide.
See Also
Delete a Volume on page 38
Dell Compellent
289
User Interface Reference for System Properties

This section provides a description of the System Properties options.
System Properties General Tab

Use the General tab to enter the Storage Center name and IP addresses and to set the
operation mode.
Field
Description
Name
Name the Storage Center
Type
Object type
Storage Center ID
Typically the licensed controller number
Management IP Address
(IPv4)
Used for dual-controller configurations to run the System Manager

software. This IP address is always connected to the leader.
(IPv6)
Optional address using IPv6 address.
Management IP Prefix (IPv6) Prefix required when using IPv6 address. This is set in the controller
properties and displayed for information only.
Operation Mode
Can be set to Normal, Maintenance, Install, PreProduction
See Also
Modifying System Properties on page 226
Rename the Storage Center on page 226
Set the System Management IP Address on page 227
290
System Properties Storage Tab

Use the Storage tab to change the stripe width for RAID storage. Modifying this setting
changes how data is distributed across the drives. Distributing data across more drives is
marginally more efficient, but increases vulnerability. Distributing data across fewer drives
is less efficient, but marginally decreases vulnerability
Field
Description
RAID 5 Stripe Width

5 Wide (80% Efficient)
RAID 5-5 distributes parity blocks across five drives
RAID 5-9 distributes parity blocks across nine drives.
RAID 6 Stripe Width

RAID 6-6 distributes parity blocks across six drives
RAID 6-10 distributes parity blocks across 10 drives
See Also
Select RAID Stripe Width on page 228
Dell Compellent
291
System Properties Data Progression Tab

Data Progression is a separately licensed application program. To see if your Storage
Center includes Data Progression, click the Help icon at the top of the main pane. Use the
Data Progression tab to set the time and duration for Data Progression to run.
Field
Description
Everyday at
Allows you to set the time of day to run Data Progression
Maximum Run Time
Set the amount of time for running Data Progression
See Also
About Data Progression on page 229
Schedule Data Progression on page 229
Determine if Data Progression is Running on page 230
Stop Data Progression on page 230
292
System Properties Cache Tab

Use the Cache tab to enable or disable read and write cache. For example, if you are
planning to upgrade a controller in Storage Center, you may be instructed to disable Write
Cache in order to stop activity to the cache card prior to shutting down the controller.
Field
Description
Enable Read Cache
Select or clear the check box to enable or disable read cache.

Current status is given below the selection
Enable Write Cache
Select or clear the check box to enable or disable write cache.

Current status is given below the selection
See Also
Set System Cache on page 231
Dell Compellent
293
System Properties Disk Sparing Tab

Use the Disk Sparing tab to set the spare disk requirements.
Field
Description
Default Number of Spares Per Enclosure
Number of disks to be used as hot spares in disk

folders.
Minimum Disks Per Enclosure Before Auto

Sparing
Number of disks to allow before automatically setting

up hot spares.
See Also
Configure Global Disk Spares on page 232
294
System Properties Message Tab

Use the Message tab to add a login message such as usage guidelines or user
requirements.
See Also
Add a Login Message on page 233
Dell Compellent
295
System Properties Info Tab

Use the Info tab to insert notes about the Storage Center.
See Also
Add Optional Information about Storage Center on page 234
296
Users and User Groups

This chapter describes how to manage access to Storage Center and configure user
volume defaults.
Contents
Understanding Users, User Groups, and Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Enabling Directory Services Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Managing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Configuring User Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Managing User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
User Interface Reference for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Dell Compellent
297
Chapter 9 Users and User Groups
Understanding Users, User Groups, and Authentication

Users have access to folders, volumes, views, and commands depending on their privilege
level and the User Groups to which they belong. User accounts can be created locally and/
or exist externally in a directory service.
User Privilege Levels

Each user is assigned a single privilege level. Storage Center has three levels of user
privilege:
Administrator
Administrators have read and write access to the entire Storage Center there are no
restrictions on their access. All Administrators have the same pre-defined privileges.
Only Administrators can manage Users and User Groups.
Volume Managers
Volume Managers have access to the folders associated with their assigned User
Groups. They can create volumes in the allowed volume folders and map them to
existing servers in the allowed server folders.
Reporters
Reporters have read-only access to the folders associated with their assigned User
Groups.
User Groups
Volume, server, and disk folder access for Volume Managers and Reporters is granted
through the User Groups to which the user is assigned. Administrators have access to all
folders and do not have an assigned User Group.
For Volume Managers, User Groups restrict:
Access to volume, server, and disk folders
Default values used when a Volume Manager creates a volume
For Reporters, User Groups restrict access to volume, server, and disk folders.
User Groups can give a Volume Manager or Reporter the impression that they are the only
users of the Storage Center. These users can see only the volume, server, and disk folders
made available to them.
The User Groups to which a user has access appear in the main pane of the System
Explorer.
User Account Management and Authentication

You can grant access to Storage Center using either of the following methods:
Create local Storage Center users

User accounts can be created and maintained using System Manager. Local users are
managed in the Users node in the System Tree.
Configure Storage Center to authenticate users in an external directory service

In environments that use Active Directory or OpenLDAP, you can configure Storage
Center to authenticate directory users. Access can be granted to individual directory
users and directory user groups. These users log on to System Manager using their
username/password domain credentials.
298
Understanding Users, User Groups, and Authentication
Similar to local users, directory users are managed in the Users node in the System
Tree.
You cannot simultaneously configure Storage Center to use Active Directory and
OpenLDAP. However, local accounts can be used regardless of your external environment.
Caution: Dell Compellent recommends enabling at least one local user with
Administrator privileges when using directory services. This account can be
used to manage Storage Center in the event that the Active Directory/
OpenLDAP servers are inaccessible and directory users cannot be
authenticated.
Configuration Requirements for External Directory Services

Configuring Storage Center to use Active Directory or OpenLDAP authentication is a twopart process:
Enable directory services authentication. If you configure Active Directory, you must
also join the controller to the domain.
Grant directory users and directory user groups access to Storage Center.
Active Directory and OpenLDAP have different authentication requirements:
To use Active Directory with Storage Center, you must configure Kerberos
authentication. Kerberos ensures encrypted communications with the Active Directory
server(s).
To use OpenLDAP with Storage Center, you can either use password authentication or
Kerberos authentication. Kerberos ensures encrypted communications with the
OpenLDAP server(s). If you configure password authentication instead of Kerberos, you
must configure SSL/TLS to encrypt communications with the OpenLDAP server(s).
Choosing an Account Management Method

The table below briefly compares both account management methods.
Type
Advantages
Disadvantages
Local accounts
Good in environments with few

Storage Center Administrators or
where few ad-hoc accounts are
needed.
If the Active Directory/OpenLDAP

servers are inaccessible, users can
still be authenticated.
In environments that use Active

Directory/OpenLDAP, parallel sets
of users need to be maintained in
Active Directory/OpenLDAP and
System Manager.
In environments with multiple

Storage Centers, users need to be
created on each Storage Center.
Allows central management of users.
If the Active Directory/OpenLDAP

servers are inaccessible, users
cannot be authenticated.
Active Directory/
OpenLDAP
accounts
Dell Compellent
Allows multiple Storage Centers to

point to Active Directory/OpenLDAP
so users can log on to each Storage
Center.
Granting or removing access by user

group allows scalability in large
environments with many Storage
Center Administrators.
Leverages existing Active Directory/

OpenLDAP infrastructure.
299
Enabling Directory Services Authentication

Before you can grant Storage Center access to directory users and directory user groups,
you must first configure Storage Center to communicate with one or more Active Directory/
OpenLDAP servers. If you use Kerberos authentication, you must also configure Storage
Center to communicate with the Kerberos Key Distribution Center (KDC).
Prerequisites
An Active Directory or OpenLDAP directory service must be deployed in your

environment.
Storage Center must have network connectivity to the directory service.
You must be familiar with the Active Directory/OpenLDAP configuration of the directory
service.
Storage Center requires credentials from a directory service user that is allowed to
query the directory service and who has sufficient privileges to perform a bind operation.
(Active Directory only) Joining the controller to the domain requires credentials from a
directory service user who is an administrator and who has sufficient privileges to create
a computer record in the directory.
(Active Directory only) To join the controller to the domain, forward and reverse DNS
records for the Storage Center must be created in the domain. For a single-controller
Storage Center system, create DNS records for the controller IP address. For a dualcontroller Storage Center system, create DNS records for the management IP address.
(OpenLDAP only) To use password authentication with OpenLDAP, an SSL certificate

is required to communicate with the directory service using SSL/TLS.
Steps
1 From the Storage Management menu, select System Access Configure
Authentication. The Configure Authentication wizard starts.
300
2 Select the Enable External Directory Services check box.

3 Enter the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of one or more domain controllers
separated by spaces.
4 Click Start.
5 From the Directory Type drop-down menu, select the directory service implementation
to use: either Active Directory or Open LDAP.
6 Specify Active Directory/OpenLDAP connection information and parameters for your
environment. Required fields are denoted with an asterisk (*).
Note: You can specify custom LDAP search filters at the command-line interface
(CLI) to distinguish a pool of users or user groups from which Storage Center
access can be granted. Dell Compellent strongly recommends contacting Dell
Technical Support Services for assistance if you want to use custom LDAP
search filters.
Dell Compellent
301
Field
Description
URI*
Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for one or more Active

Directory/OpenLDAP servers to which Storage Center will
connect. Use the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the
servers.
Example URIs for two servers:
ldap://server1.example.com ldap://server2.example.com:1234
Note: Adding multiple servers ensures continued authorization

of users in the event of a resource outage. If Storage Center
cannot establish contact with the first server, Storage Center will
attempt to connect to the remaining servers in the order listed.
Server Connection Timeout*
Maximum time (in seconds) that Storage Center will wait while
attempting to connect to an Active Directory/OpenLDAP server.
Base DN*
LDAP Base Distinguished Name. The Base DN indicates where

in the directory to begin searching for users.
Relative Base
LDAP node where computers are stored. If you configure Active

Directory, the Relative Base indicates where the controller
should be joined to the domain.
Storage Center Hostname*
For a single-controller Storage Center system, this is the fully

qualified hostname for the controller IP address.
For a dual-controller Storage Center system, this is the fully

qualified hostname for the management IP address.
LDAP Domain*
LDAP domain to search.
Auth Bind Username*
Fully qualified username of the user that Storage Center uses to

connect to and search the Active Directory/OpenLDAP server.
The account must have sufficient privileges to perform a bind
operation.
Auth Bind Password*
Password for the Auth Bind Username.
7 (Optional) Click Test Servers to verify that Storage Center can communicate with the
specified Active Directory/OpenLDAP server(s).
8 (Conditional) If you configured OpenLDAP and want to use password authentication,
upload certificates to use SSL/TLS to encrypt communications with the OpenLDAP
server(s).
a Click Upload TLS Cert.
b Browse to and select the certificate file for the directory server, in .pem format, and
then click Continue. This certificate contains the key information from the directory
service.
c Browse to and select the CA bundle certificate file, in .pem format, and then click
Continue. The CA bundle certificate contains the signer information from the
directory service.
9 Click Continue. If you configured Active Directory, Kerberos authentication is required,
therefore, the Enable Kerberos option will not display.
302
10 (Conditional) If you configured Active Directory, or if you configured OpenLDAP and

want to use Kerberos, configure Kerberos authentication. Required fields are denoted
with an asterisk (*).
a If you configured OpenLDAP, select the Enable Kerberos check box.
b Specify Kerberos connection information for your environment.
Field
Description
Domain Realms*
Kerberos domain realm to authenticate against. In Windows

networks, this is the domain name in uppercase characters.
KDC Hostname*
Fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the Key Distribution

Center (KDC) to which Storage Center will connect.
Password Renew Rate

(Days)
Number of days before the keytab is regenerated. The default

value is 0, which equates to a password renew rate of 14 days.
11 Click Continue.
Dell Compellent
303
12 (Conditional) If you configured Active Directory, join the controller to the domain to allow
Storage Center to communicate with the directory service.
Note: To join the controller to the domain, forward and reverse DNS records for
the Storage Center must be created in the domain. For a single-controller
Storage Center system, create DNS records for the controller IP address. For a
dual-controller Storage Center system, create DNS records for the management
IP address.
a Click Join.
304
b Enter the user name of a directory service administrator in the DS Admin Username
field. This account must have sufficient privileges to create a computer record in the
directory.
c Enter the password for the directory service user in the DS Admin Password field.
d Click Join Now.
13 Click Finish Now.
See Also
Grant Access to a Directory User on page 307
Grant Access to a Directory User Group on page 308
Dell Compellent
305
Managing Users
To create and delete users, grant access to directory users and directory user groups, or
change properties for other users, you must have Administrator privileges. Volume
Managers and Reporters can change their own properties but cannot change properties for
anyone else.
Create a Local User

Use the Create User wizard to add local users that can access Storage Center.
1 In the System Tree, right-click the Users icon.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Create User. The Create User wizard starts.
3 Enter a User Name and the Full Name of the user.

4 Select a Privileges level for the user.
5 Select a Session Timeout for the user.
6 Add any optional Notes.
7 Click Continue.
8 Enter the user's email information. This information is used to contact the user when
alerts occur. To send a test email, click Send test e-mail next to an address. SMTP must
be configured to send a test email to the users email address.
9 Click Continue.
10 Enter the users contact information: Department, Title, Location, Business Phone,
Mobile Phone, and Home Phone. These fields are optional.
11 Click Continue.
12 Enter and confirm a password for the user. A password is required.
13 Click Continue.
14 (Required only when creating a non-Administrator user) If User Groups exist, select a
User Group to assign to the user. If a User Group has not been created, click Create
User Group.
306
Managing Users
15 Click Continue. System Manager displays a summary showing the attributes you
entered for the user.
16 Click Create Now.
Grant Access to a Directory User

Use the Grant Access to Directory User wizard to grant individual directory users access
to Storage Center.
Prerequisites
Directory services authentication must be enabled. See Enabling Directory Services
Authentication on page 300.
Steps
1 From the Storage Management menu, select User Grant Access to Directory
User. The Grant Access to Directory User wizard displays.
2 Enter the fully qualified user name of the directory user in the User Name field.
3 Enter the Distinguished Name of the directory user in the Distinguished Name field.
4 Click Continue.
5 Select a Privileges level for the user.
6 Select a Session Timeout for the user.
7 Add any optional Notes.
8 Click Continue.
9 Enter the user's email information. This information is used to contact the user when
alerts occur. To send a test email, click Send test e-mail next to an address. SMTP must
be configured to send a test email to the users email address.
10 Click Continue.
11 Enter the users contact information: Department, Title, Location, Business Phone,
Mobile Phone, and Home Phone. These fields are optional.
12 Click Continue.
Dell Compellent
307
13 (Required only when creating a non-Administrator user) If User Groups exist, select a
User Group.
15 Click Grant Access.
Grant Access to a Directory User Group

Use the Grant Access to Directory Group wizard to grant Storage Center access to users
who are members of a directory user group.
Note: User properties such as user email information and user contact information
are not configured as part of the Grant Access to Directory Group wizard. Members
of directory user groups must log on to System Manager once before they display
in the Users node in the System Tree. Then, the users attributes can be configured
by modifying the users properties.
Prerequisites
Directory services authentication must be enabled. See Enabling Directory Services
Authentication on page 300.
Steps
1 From the Storage Management menu, select User Grant Access to Directory
Group. The Grant Access to Directory Group wizard displays.
2 Enter a display name for the directory user group in the Display Name field. This is the
name that you want to display in System Manager.
308
Managing Users
3 Enter the Distinguished Name of the directory user group in the Distinguished Name
field.
4 Select a Privileges level for the directory user group. This privileges level applies to all
members of the directory user group.
5 (Optional) Click Show Mappings to see a list of directory user groups that are currently
assigned to local User Groups. If a directory user group is assigned to multiple local
User Groups, each mapping is displayed on a separate line. Directory user groups with
Administrator privileges are not displayed because they do not have an assigned User
Group. When finished, click Back.
6 Click Continue.
7 (Required only when creating non-Administrator users) If User Groups exist, select a
User Group to assign to the directory user group. If a User Group has not been created,
click Create User Group.
entered for the directory user group.
9 Click Grant Access.
Dell Compellent
309
View Directory User Groups

The Manage Directory Group Access window displays current directory user groups that
have access to Storage Center. This windows allows you to grant, modify, and remove
Storage Center access for directory user groups.
From the Storage Management menu, select User Manage Directory Group Access.
310
Managing Users
Modify User Properties

Use the User Properties dialog box to view or modify a users general properties, contact
information, user view access, or notes. You must have Administrator privileges to view
information for another user. Volume Managers and Reporters can view their own
properties but cannot view properties for anyone else.
Modify General User Properties

Use the General tab on the User Properties dialog box to change general properties, such
as full name and session timeout, for the selected user.
1 In the System Tree, right-click a user name.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The User Properties dialog box appears.
3 Click the General tab.
4 Change the full name or session timeout as needed, or upgrade privileges for a Volume
Manager or Reporter user.
5 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
311
Modify User Contact Information

Use the Contact tab on the User Properties dialog box to change user contact information,
such as phone numbers and email addresses, for the selected user.
3 Click the Contact tab.
4 Change any of the fields as needed.

5 To send a test email, click Send test e-mail next to an address. SMTP must be
configured to send a test email to the users email address.
6 Click OK.
312
Managing Users
Modify User View Access

Use the Tabs tab on the User Properties dialog box to restrict access to the View menu
options for the selected user.
3 Click the Tabs tab. System Manager displays a list of Views to which the user has
access.
4 Select or clear Views to which the user has access.

5 Select the Save tab changes across sessions check box to ensure that the Tabs
settings remain after the user logs off.
6 Click OK.
Modify User Notes

Use the Info tab on the User Properties dialog box to add notes or view general
information about the user.
1 In the System Tree, right-click a user name
3 Click the Info tab. System Manager displays the following information:
Date Created: User creation date
Created By: Who created the user
Date Updated: Last date user properties were updated
Updated By: Who updated the user properties
4 Enter Notes.
5 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
313
Change Local User Passwords

Users can change their own passwords, and Administrators can change all passwords.
Note: Passwords for directory users are maintained in Active Directory/OpenLDAP
and cannot be changed using System Manager.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Change User Password. The Change User
Password dialog box appears.
3 Enter and confirm a password.
4 Click OK. The password is changed.
Downgrade User Privileges

To downgrade user privileges, you must delete the user and re-create the user with a new
name. You cannot recreate a user with downgraded privileges with the same user name.
You must have Administrator privileges to delete and create users.
See Also
Delete a User on page 315
Create a Local User on page 306
Upgrade User Privileges

You must have Administrator privileges to upgrade user privileges.
3 In the Privileges field, select an upgraded privilege level.
4 Click OK.
Modify User Privileges for a Directory User Group

User privileges are modified on a group basis rather than a user basis because all members
of the directory user group must have the same privileges. You must have Administrator
privileges to downgrade or upgrade user privileges for directory user groups.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select User Manage Directory Group
Access. The Manage Directory Group Access window appears.
2 Select the directory user group for which you want to modify user privileges.
3 Click Modify Group Access.
4 In the Privileges field, select a new privilege level.
5 Click Continue.
6 Click Continue.
7 Click Modify Access.
8 Click Close.
314
Managing Users
Disable a User
Users that have been disabled cannot log on to System Manager. You must have
Administrator privileges to disable a user.
3 Clear the Enabled check box to disable a user.
Note: If you disable yourself, you will not be able to log on again. If all users are
disabled, no one will be able to log on to change the restriction. Everyone,
including you, will be locked out of System Manager.
4 Click OK.
Delete a User
You must have Administrator privileges to delete a user.
Note: Once a user is deleted, that user name cannot be reused for a new user. You
can, however, reuse the same user name when restoring a user.
Note: Directory user group membership should be maintained in Active Directory/
OpenLDAP and individual members should not be deleted using System Manager.
To remove access for an entire directory user group, see Remove Access for a
Directory User Group on page 315
3 Click Yes. The user is deleted.
Remove Access for a Directory User Group

You must have Administrator privileges to remove Storage Center access for users who are
members of a directory user group.
2 Select the directory user group for which you want to remove Storage Center access.
3 Click Remove Group Access. System Manager asks you to confirm.
4 Click Yes.
5 Click Close.
Dell Compellent
315
Restore a User
You can restore a previously deleted user. You must have Administrator privileges to
restore a user.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select User Restore Deleted User. The
Restore Deleted User wizard starts.
2 From the list of deleted users, select the user you want to restore. You can only select
one user at a time to restore.
3 Click Continue.
4 Enter the user's email information and click Continue. This information is used to
contact the user when alerts occur.
5 Enter the users contact information and click Continue.
6 Enter and confirm a password for the user and click Continue.
7 (Required only when restoring a non-Administrator user) If User Groups exist, select a
User Group.
9 Click Restore Now. The user is restored and the user name is displayed in the System
Tree.
316
Configuring User Volume Defaults

User volume defaults affect all levels of users: Administrator, Volume Manager, and
Reporter.
Administrators can always use the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box and
change any user volume defaults.
Volume Managers can only change volume defaults if an Administrator enables Allow
User to Modify Preferences. If enabled, Volume Managers can change their own
volume default preferences. If disabled, the Volume Manager does not have the option
to change volume default preferences.
Reporters cannot create volumes so volume defaults do not apply.
There are three different user volume default commands. Though they are similar, each
command has a different purpose:
My User Volume Defaults: With Administrator privileges, you can change your own
volume default preferences.
Other User Volume Defaults: With Administrator privileges, you can select one or
more current users and change their user volume defaults. If you change the volume
defaults for another Administrator, when that user logs on, the defaults you enabled
appear as the initial configuration. That Administrator can, of course, change these
defaults.
With Administrator privileges, if you disable the option to change Create Volume
defaults for a Volume Manager, that Volume Manager will not be able to change Create
Volume defaults. Specifically, if you disable the option to change these defaults and
advanced Create Volume options are disabled, a Volume Manager will not be able to
select non-standard options for the volume for which he/she is responsible.
New User Volume Defaults: New user volume defaults apply to users that will be
created in the future. This streamlines the process of creating users. If you create
Volume Managers and by default disable their ability to change their user volume
defaults, they will not be able to change Create Volume defaults.
Administrative users will be created with new user volume defaults, but they can always
changes these defaults. New user volume defaults are only for new users. Defaults are
not retroactive.
Dell Compellent
317
Select Whether Users Can Change Their Volume Defaults

Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to select whether
users can change their volume defaults.
1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume
defaults you want to modify:
My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select

Volume Configure My Volume Defaults.
Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the
shortcut menu, select Configure Users Volume Defaults.
New User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select User
Configure New User Volume Defaults.
3 Select or clear the Allow User to Modify Preferences check box to permit or disallow
a user to change his or her defaults. All users with Administrator privileges can allow or
disallow all other users from modifying preferences, including their own.
4 Click OK.
318
Set Disk and Cache Volume Defaults

Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set default disk
and cache options.

3 Set these defaults:
Select a Disk Folder from which to draw storage. Select or clear the Allow Changes
check box to indicate whether disk folder options are presented to the user when he
or she creates a volume.
Select Cache options. If caching is disabled for the Storage Center, you can enable
it for a volume but it will not do any good. However, if cache settings are enabled for
the Storage Center, you can enable it for an individual volume. Select or clear the
Allow Changes check box to indicate which caching options are presented to the
user when he or she creates a volume.
4 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
319
Set the Default Volume Size

Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set the default
size for new volumes.

3 Enter a Volume Size (or accept the default). The default is 500 GB.
4 Click OK.
320
Set the Default Volume Name

Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set the default
name for new volumes.

3 Enter a Base Volume Name (or accept the default). When you create many volumes at
one time, System Manager increments this name by one. As you add volumes, the
names appear as New Volume 1, New Volume 2, New Volume 3, and so forth.
4 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
321
Set Storage Volume Defaults

Use the Advanced tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set default
data storage options.
Caution: Changing advanced user volume defaults can adversely affect Storage
Center performance. We strongly recommend you do not change these defaults.

3 Set the storage volume defaults.

4 Click OK.
See Also
Remove a Storage Class on page 209
Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type on page 210
About Storage Profiles on page 212
322
Set Replay Volume Defaults

Use the Replay tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set options that
determine whether Replays are assigned to new volumes by default, and if so, which
Replay profile to assign to the volume.

2 Click the Replay tab.
3 From the drop-down menu, select the default Replay schedule behavior:
Never schedule Replays during volume creation
Always prompt for Replay scheduling during volume creation
Always use the Default Replay Profile to schedule Replays for new volumes
4 Select a default Replay Profile.

5 Enter a Minimum Allowed Replay Interval (or accept the default). The default is 5
minutes. This restricts the intervals between Replays and prevents a user from
overloading the Storage Center with Replays.
6 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
323
Set Mapping Volume Defaults

Use the Mapping tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set options
that determine the level of mapping displayed to the user and whether to automatically map
volumes to a default server.

2 On the General tab, make sure the Allow User to Modify Preferences check box is
selected.
4 Set these defaults:
Select or clear the Allow advanced mapping check box. If you allow advanced
mapping, select or clear the Show advanced details in mapping displays check
box.
Select the Automatically map volumes to default server check box to speed
volume creation. If the Automatically map volume to default server check box is
selected, select a server to automatically map volumes to.
5 Click OK.
See Also
Server Mapping on page 107
324
Set the Default Server Operating System

Use the Mapping tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set the default
server Operating System.

2 On the General tab, make sure the Allow User to Modify Preferences check box is
selected.
4 From the Default Server Operating System drop-down menu, select an Operating
System.
5 Click OK.
Dell Compellent
325
Managing User Groups

Volume, server, and disk folder access for Volume Managers and Reporters is granted
through the User Groups to which the user is assigned. Administrators have access to all
folders and do not have an assigned User Group. To manage user groups, you must have
Administrator privileges.
Create a New User Group

Use the Create User Group wizard to create new user groups.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select User Manage User Groups.
2 In the Manage User Groups page, click New Group. The Create User Group wizard
starts.
3 From the list of volume folders, select a volume folder to be included in the new User
Group. Users will have access to volumes in this folder. If you do not want subfolders to
be included, clear the Include Sub Folders check box.
4 (Optional) Click Create a New Folder to create a new folder not listed on this screen.
5 Click Next.
6 From the list of server folders, select a server folder to be included in the new User
Group. Users will have access to servers in this folder. If you do not want subfolders to
be included, clear the Include Sub Folders check box.
7 (Optional) Click Create a New Folder to create a new folder not listed on this screen.
8 Click Next.
9 From the list of disk folders, select a disk folder to be included in the new User Group.
This folder contains the storage to be used for volumes created by this User Group.
10 Click Next.
11 Enter a User Group Name (or accept the default).
12 Click Create Now. You are returned to the original Manage User Groups page.
326
Rename a User Group

Use the Update User Group page to change a User Group name.
2 In the Manage User Groups page, select the User Group to rename.
3 Click Modify Group. The Update User Group page appears.
4 Click Rename.
5 Enter a New Name for the User Group.
6 Click Rename Now.
7 Click Return.
8 Click Close.
Dell Compellent
327
Remove a folder from a User Group

Removing a folder from a User Group denies access to that folder to users who are
assigned to that User Group.
Note: A user who has access to more than one User Group may still have access
to the folder you removed from a specific User Group.
2 In the Manage User Groups page, select the User Group from which to remove a
folder.
3 Click Modify Group. The Update User Group page appears showing volume, server,
and disk folders accessible by the User Group.
4 Select a folder or subfolder to remove.
5 Click Remove Folder. System Manager asks you to confirm.
6 If you do not want to remove all subfolders of the selected folder, clear the Remove
from sub folders check box.
7 Click Yes.
8 Click Return.
9 Click Close.
Add a Folder to a User Group

Adding a folder to a User Group gives access to that folder to users who are assigned to
that User Group.
2 In the Manage User Groups page, select the User Group to which to add a folder.
3 Click Modify Group. The Update User Group page appears showing volume, server,
and disk folders accessible by the User Group.
4 Click Add Folder.
5 Select one of the following:
Add Volume Folder: System Manager displays a list of volume folders. Select a
volume folder to add. Choose whether to include or exclude subfolders.
Add Server Folder: System Manager displays a list of server folders. Select a
server folder to add. Choose whether to include or exclude subfolders.
Add Disk Folder: System Manager displays a list of disk folders. Select a disk folder
to add.
6 Click Add Now.

7 Click Return.
8 Click Close.
328
Delete a User Group

Use the Manage User Groups page to delete User Groups.
2 In the Manage User Groups page, select the User Group to delete.
3 Click Delete Group. System Manager asks you to confirm.
4 Click Yes.
5 Click Close.
Add a User Group to a User

Adding User Groups to an existing Volume Manager or Reporter user allows the user to
access the volumes and servers in the folders associated with the selected User Groups.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select User Add User Groups. The Add
User Groups wizard starts.
2 Click a user name to which to add a User Group.
3 Click Continue.
4 Select a User Group to add to the user.
5 Click Add Now.
Remove a User Group From a User

Removing User Groups from an existing Volume Manager or Reporter user denies access
for the user to the volumes and servers in the folders associated with the selected User
Groups.
1 From the Storage Management menu, select User Remove User Groups. The
Remove User Groups wizard starts.
2 Click a user name from which to remove a User Group.
3 Click Continue.
4 Select a User Group to remove from the user.
6 Click Yes.
Dell Compellent
329
Add or Remove a Mapping from a Local User Group to a

Directory User Group
Adding or removing local User Group associations is performed on a group basis rather
than a user basis because all members of the directory user group must be mapped to the
same User Groups.
Mapping User Groups to an existing directory user group with Volume Manager or Reporter
privileges allows the users to access the volumes and servers in the folders associated with
the selected User Groups. Removing a User Group association from an existing directory
user group with Volume Manager or Reporter privileges denies access for the users to the
volumes and servers in the folders associated with the selected User Groups.
2 Select the directory user group for which you want to modify User Group associations.
3 Click Modify Group Access.
4 Click Continue.
5 Select a User Group to add to or remove from the directory user group.
6 Click Continue.
7 Click Modify Access.
8 Click Close.
330
User Interface Reference for Users

This section provides a description of user interface elements used for user information.
General Information About All Users

The Users node in the System Tree displays a list of current users and allows you to create
and modify users.
Note: Members of directory user groups appear in the Users node only after they
log on to System Manager for the first time.
Field
Description
Name
Name of the user.
Enabled
Indicates whether the user is enabled.
Privileges
Privilege level assigned to the user Administrator, Volume

Manager, or Reporter.
Full Name
Full name specified for the user.
User Groups
User Groups assign to the user.
See Also
Create a Local User on page 306
Grant Access to a Directory User Group on page 308
Dell Compellent
331
General Information About an Individual User

When you select a user name in the System Tree, System Manager displays a summary
of the users settings.
Field
Description
Name
Name of the user.
Index
Unique user ID.

This number is required by Dell Technical Support Services to assist
with component identification.
332
Type
Object type in this case User.
Enabled
Indicates whether the user is enabled.
Privileges
Privilege level assigned to the user Administrator, Volume

Manager, or Reporter.
User Groups
User Groups assign to the user.
Session Timeout
Time the user can be inactive in System Manager before the user is
automatically logged out.
Full Name
Full name specified for the user.
Department
Department specified for the user.
Title
Title specified for the user.
Location
Location specified for the user.
Business Phone
Business phone number specified for the user.
Field
Description
Mobile Phone
Mobile phone number specified for the user.
Home Phone
Home phone number specified for the user.
Email
Email address specified for the user.
Email 2
Email 3
Date Created
User creation date.
Created By
Who created the user.
Date Updated
Last date user properties were updated.
Updated By
Who updated the user properties.
Notes
Notes specified for the user.
See Also
Modify User Properties on page 311
Downgrade User Privileges on page 314
Upgrade User Privileges on page 314
Modify User Privileges for a Directory User Group on page 314
Dell Compellent
333
334
Server HBA Settings

This appendix contains summary information about HBA settings. Consult the Dell
Compellent Knowledge Center for additional information such as: current technical alerts,
white papers, best practices, tip sheets, and visual demos.
Contents
Queue Depth Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Settings by HBA Vendor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Settings by Server Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Queue Depth Considerations

In SAN environments, HBA queue depth represents the number of pending storage I/O
operations waiting to be executed against the SAN. To maximize performance, it is
important to properly configure HBA queue depth to ensure that the storage subsystem
runs efficiently. A queue depth setting that is too high may result in poor performance while
a queue depth setting that is too low may under-utilize storage ports. Queue depth settings
on HBAs can also be used to throttle servers so that the most critical servers are allowed
greater access to the required storage and network bandwidth. Therefore, it is important to
properly tune HBA queue depth settings (which may differ from the factory default settings)
for your configuration.
This appendix offers some suggested settings. You should, however, be aware that
choosing a proper queue depth is configuration-dependent. Settings will vary depending
on: the applications being run, the number of ports, the number of volumes, and so forth. It
is also strongly recommended that settings be tested before being put into production
mode.
Settings by HBA Vendor

This section includes information for the following HBA types:
Dell Compellent
Cisco Fibre Channel Cards
Emulex Fibre Channel Cards
LSI Cards
Qlogic Fibre Channel Cards
Qlogic iSCSI Cards
335
Appendix A Server HBA Settings
Cisco Fibre Channel Cards

For adapter settings and advanced settings, configure values as follows
Field
Setting
FCP Error Recovery
Disabled (default)
Flogi Retries
60
Flogi Timeout
4000 (default)
Plogi Retries
60
Plogi Timeout
20000 (default)
Port Down Timeout
10000 (default)
Port Down IO Retry
60 (default)
Link Down Timeout
30000 (default)
Emulex Fibre Channel Cards

You can configure settings for the Emulex Fibre Channel adapter from the Emulex
LightPulse BIOS on system boot by pressing <CTRL> <E> or <ALT> <E> when prompted.
If you are using Windows, you can also use the Emulex HBAnywhere utility to modify HBA
configuration settings. Download this utility from:
www.emulex.com.
Adapter Settings
For adapter and advanced settings, values should be configured as follows:
Field
Setting
NodeTimeOut
60
QueueDepth
254
Note: This is a generally recommended setting. Your configuration may
perform better with a different setting.
Topology
336
See Also
Queue Depth Considerations on page 335
Dell Compellent
337
Registry Editor Parameters

To view Registry Editor parameters for Elxstor port settings, go to:
Computer\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\elxstor\
Parameters\[WWPN of port on card]
To view the Registry Editor parameters for Elxstor device settings, go to:
Computer\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\elxstor\
Parameters\Device
LSI Cards
There are no configurable settings for LSI HBA cards.
338
Qlogic Fibre Channel Cards

QLA23xx / QLE23xx / QLA24xx / QLE25xx
You can configure QLogic Fibre Channel settings from theQLogic BIOS FastUtil on system
boot by pressing <CTRL> <Q> when prompted.
If you are using Windows, you can also use the QLogic SANsurfer utility to modify HBA
configuration settings. Download this utility from:
http://www.qlogic.com.
For adapter settings and advanced settings, configure values as follows:
Field
Setting
Connection options
1 for point-to-point only
Login retry count
60 attempts
Port down retry count
60 attempts
Link down timeout
30 seconds
Queue depth
256
Note: This is a generally recommended setting. Your configuration may
perform better with a different setting.
See Also
Queue Depth Considerations on page 335
Dell Compellent
339
Qlogic iSCSI Cards

QLA40XX / QLE40xx
In addition to the settings recommended for QLogic Fibre Channel adapters, set the ARP
Redirect field to Enabled.
1 From the QLogic SANsurfer iSCSI HBA Manager, click the Port Options tab.
2 Click the Firmware tab.
3 Select an HBA and enable ARP redirect by clicking the check box in the ARP Redirect
column. This setting is circled in red below.
4 Select OK and then Close.

5 To save settings, select the Save Port Settings option. If prompted for a password,
enter config. After the password is accepted, the card will reset and the new
configuration will be activated and saved.
340
Settings by Server Operating System

This section includes information for the following operating systems:
Citrix XenServer Version 5.x and Above
HP-UX Settings
IBM AIX Settings
Microsoft Windows Server 2000/2003/2008/2012 Settings
Novell Netware Settings
Oracle Solaris Settings
Red Hat Linux RHEL Settings
SuSE Linux SLES
VMWare Settings
Citrix XenServer Version 5.x and Above

Use the timeout values given in this section to ensure that the Citrix XenServer fails over
properly.
Note: If the server is configured in a high-availability cluster, contact Citrix for best
practices for setting high-availability timeout values.
1 Open the /opt/xensource/sm/mpathHBA file.
2 Change the settings in the following fields:
Field
Setting
DEFAULT_TIMEOUT
60
MPATH_TIMEOUT
60
3 Save the file and reboot.
HP-UX Settings
HP-UX Version 11.31
HP-UX 11.31 requires that Agile Addressing is enabled for proper failover of Dell
Compellent Storage Center controllers.
HP-UX Version 11.21 or Earlier

No specific setting changes are required, however, a Cisco fabric with Persistent FCID
enabled is required to survive Dell Compellent Storage Center controller failover or port
rebalance.
IBM AIX Settings

The Compellent MPIO ODM Path Control Module must be installed on the AIX server for
proper operation with the Dell Compellent Storage Center.
Dell Compellent
Field
Setting
queue_depth hdisk attribute
32
rw_timeout hdisk
60
341
Microsoft Windows Server 2000/2003/2008/2012 Settings

See the following Microsoft documentation for complete details on changing registry values
for the iSCSI initiator:
http://blogs.msdn.com/b/san/archive/2008/07/27/microsoft-iscsi-software-initiator-isnsserver-timers-quick-reference.aspx
Disk Time Out Setting

Verify that this value is set to 60 to indicate a 60-second disk timeout threshold. If this value
is set incorrectly, use the Registry Editor to correct:
1 In regedit, locate:
H_Key_Local_Machine\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\Disk
2 Reset the value to:

TimeoutValue=60
Note: The default value for Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 and later
(including Windows Server 2008) is 60 seconds. However, Windows Server 2003
RTM contained a different timeout value than specified. If clustering was installed
before Service Pack 1, then installer will set the TimeoutValue to 20 on the cluster
nodes.
This is a bug in Windows Server 2003 RTM and was corrected in Service Pack 1. It
is recommended that the latest service pack be installed prior to installing the
clustering service.
Novell Netware Settings

In the nwserver/startup.ncf file, add:
/LUNS /ALLPATHS /ALLPORTS /PORTDOWN=60
to the end of the Fibre Channel driver load line.
Oracle Solaris Settings

Changes to Solaris settings require a reboot.
/kernel/drv/fcp.conf
To the bottom of the fcp.conf file, add:

fcp_offline_delay=60
Note: This setting change requires a reboot.
/kernel/drv/qlc.conf
Change the following variables to their associated values:
342
Field
Setting
login-retry-count
60
port-down-retry-count
60
link-down-timeout
30
connection-options
Note: For QLogic drivers, make the same changes to the /kernel/drv/
qla2300.conf file.
Red Hat Linux RHEL Settings

Non-Boot Environment
1 To the end of the /etc/modprobe.conf file, add:
"options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=65
# echo "options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=65" >>
/etc/modprobe.conf
# modprobe -r qla2xxx
# modprobe qla2xxx
2 Reload the driver.
Boot Environment
1 To the end of the /etc/modprobe.conf file, add:
options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=60
/etc/modprobe.conf
# mkinitrd -f -v /boot/initrd-<kernel version>.img <kernel version>
# reboot
2 Update the init RAM disk.

3 Reboot the server.
SuSE Linux SLES

Non-Boot Environment
1 To the end of the /etc/modprobe.d/qla2xxx file, add:
options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=65
/etc/modprobe.d/qla2xxx
# modprobe -r qla2xxx
# modprobe qla2xxx
2 Reload the driver.
Boot Environment
1 To the end of the kernel line in /boot/grub/menu.lst, add:
qla2xxx.qlport_down_retry=65
# vi /boot/grub/menu.lst
# reboot
2 Reboot the server.
VMWare Settings
No changes are required.
Dell Compellent
343
344
iSCSI Settings
This appendix lists recommended and required settings when using iSCSI cards.
Contents
Flow Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Other iSCSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Flow Control Settings

The following subsections provide recommended flow control settings.
Ethernet Flow Control

Ethernet (or link level) flow control is a mechanism for temporarily stopping data
transmission when a NIC, an HBA port, or a switch port is transmitting data faster than its
target port can accept the data.
Ethernet flow control allows a port to send a PAUSE frame to a target port. The PAUSE
frame temporarily pauses transmission until the target port is again able to service
requests.
Switch Ports and Flow Control

Ethernet Flow Control should be set to ON for switch ports connected to Storage Center
controller card ports.
Switch port settings for server NICs and other switch ports in the switch network should be
set to ON as recommended by the vendor.
Bi-directional Flow Control

Dell Compellent recommends the following settings as Best Practice when enabling bidirectional flow control:
Dell Compellent
Bi-directional flow control should be enabled for all switch interfaces used by servers or
controllers for iSCSI traffic.
Bi-directional flow control should be enabled for all server interfaces used for iSCSI
traffic. Storage Center and QLogic HBAs automatically enable this feature.
Bi-directional flow control should be enabled for all other interfaces that handle iSCSI
traffic. This includes all devices used for replication between two sites.
345
Appendix B iSCSI Settings
Jumbo Frames and Flow Control

Some switches have limited buffer sizes and can support either jumbo frames or flow
control, but cannot support both at the same time. If you must choose between the two
features, Dell Compellent strongly recommends choosing flow control.
However, if you use jumbo frames, be aware of the following:
Make sure that all servers, switches, and storage are fully operational before enabling
jumbo frames. This simplifies troubleshooting initial deployments.
All devices connected through iSCSI must support 9K jumbo frames.
All devices used to connect iSCSI devices must support 9K jumbo frames.
This means every switch, router, WAN accelerator, and any other network device that
handles iSCSI traffic must support 9K jumbo frames. If you are not sure that every
device in your iSCSI network supports 9K jumbo frames, then do NOT turn on this
feature.
When jumbo frames are enabled, devices on both sides (server and SAN) need them
enabled. It is recommended that any change to the jumbo frames enabled/disabled
setting is done during a maintenance window. If servers have jumbo frames enabled
first, the Storage Center will not understand the servers packets. If Storage Center has
jumbo frames enabled first, the servers will not understand the Storage Centers
packets.
QLogic 4010 series cards do not support jumbo frames. To display the model number
of a card using the Storage Center System Manager GUI as follows:
a Expand the System Tree as follows:
Controllercontroller serial numberIO cardsiSCSI
b Highlight the port. The general tab displays the model number in the description.
346
Other iSCSI Settings
Other iSCSI Settings

The following settings are Dell Compellent recommended best practices.
Setting
iSCSI Best Practice
Full Duplex
Use auto-negotiate for all interfaces that will correctly negotiate at fullduplex and at the maximum speed of the connected port (1GbE or
10GbE).
If a switch cannot correctly auto-negotiate at full-duplex or at the

maximum speed of the connection, it should be hard set at full-duplex and
at the maximum speed of the connected port (1GbE or 10GbE).
MTU
Verify the optimal MTU setting for replications. The default is 1500 but
sometimes WAN circuits or VPNs create additional overhead that can cause
packet fragmentation. This fragmentation may result in: iSCSI replication
failure and/or suboptimal performance. Adjust the MTU setting using the GUI
in 6.x Storage Center firmware.
Switch
VLAN
Dell Compellent
Configure switch interfaces that directly connect to servers or controllers

as forwarding only for Spanning Tree (STP).
Ensure that any switches used for iSCSI are of a non-blocking design.
When deciding which switches to use, remember you are running SCSI
traffic over the switch. Use only quality, managed, enterprise-class
networking equipment. It is not recommended to use SBHO (small
business/home office) class equipment outside of lab/test environments.
Be aware that inter-switch links (ISLs) that forward iSCSI traffic may
cause communication issues due to switch-port oversubscription.
Maintain separate and dedicated iSCSI VLANs. The VLANs should

remain isolated only to links designated to carry iSCSI traffic.
Maintain two separate and dedicated VLANs when using multipathed

iSCSI.
Disable unicast storm control on every switch that handles iSCSI traffic.
Disable multicast at the switch level for all iSCSI VLANs. Set multicast
storm control to enabled (if available) when multicast can not be disabled.
If you will not perform iSCSI replication between systems or sites, disable
routing between regular network and iSCSI VLANs.
347
Appendix B iSCSI Settings
348
UPS User FAQ and Configuration

This appendix provides a FAQ for using Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) and
describes configuration for two types of UPS.
Contents
UPS User FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Configuring an APC UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Configuring a Liebert UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Dell Compellent
349
Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration
UPS User FAQ

When setting up a UPS, you must configure the UPS to point to the Storage Center.
On single controller configurations, configure the UPS to point to the Eth0 address.
On dual-controller configurations, configure the UPS to point to the management IP

address. On dual-controller configurations, the management IP is used for traps.
Can any brand of UPS be used with the Storage Center?

Storage Center supports all APC UPS systems that use the AP9630 network
management card.
How does the Storage Center know which UPS should talk to it?
1 In System Explorer System Tree, right-click the UPS icon.
2 Click Create New UPS from the pop-up menu. The Create UPS wizard opens.
3 Enter the IP Address of the UPS you want the Storage Center to use. This tells the
Storage Center to accept messages from the specified UPS.
4 Enter the SNMP Community String. The Community String acts as a password and is
included in every packet transmitted between the SNMP manager and the SNMP agent.
5 Select the UPS Type from the drop-down menu. Choices are Liebert or APC.
6 Click Create Now.
Do I need to configure the UPS? How do I do this?
Yes you must configure the UPS. Configure the UPS either through APC PowerChute or
through the local serial port. You must provide the IP address of the Storage Center to the
UPS. For dual-controller systems, use the management IP address. This is the same IP
address as is used for the Storage Center System Manager.
What communications protocol does the APC UPS use?
APC UPS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP).
How does the UPS send messages?
If the UPS is on the same subnet as the Storage Center, it unicasts UDP packets. If the UPS
is on a different subnet(s), it broadcasts UDP packets.
350
UPS User FAQ
What information is provided in a UPS message?

A UPS message provides messages such as:
On Battery
Off Battery
Time to Live
Any other information displayed in the UPS GUI
What happens within Storage Center when the UPS says it is On Battery?
The following happens within Storage Center when an On Battery message is received:
The Storage Center turns off write cache and flushes it to disk.
The Storage Center then it waits for an Off Battery message or it rides the UPS until it
shuts down.
What happens to IO when the battery runs out?

The following happens to IO when the battery runs out:
Because it is down, no in-flight IO requests can be acknowledged by the Storage Center.
The driver in the OS exhausts retries or times out and issues an error to the OS that the
disk is gone. The OS then notifies the application.
When the UPSs Time to Live expires, the UPS shuts off. This is the time during which
the UPS cannot deliver the voltage and/or current to meet load requirements.
What happens to servers when the battery runs out?

The following happens to servers when the battery runs out:
Dell Compellent
APC offers PowerChute Business Edition software for free that is installed in the
server. This software monitors UPS state information packets. When a packet is
received saying the battery has two minutes (can be configured to other amounts of
time) of life left, the software triggers the OS to gracefully shut down the server.
When then server is shut down, all IO traffic to the Storage Center ceases, thus allowing
it to simply ride the UPS until it shuts down.
351
Configuring an APC UPS

You can configure up to four access control entries to specify which Network Management
Systems (NMS) have access to this UPS.
1 In a new browser window, enter the IP address of the UPS, assigned or derived from
DHCP. The UPS Network Management main window appears.
2 From the main window, click the Administration tab. The Administration pane appears.
3 Click Network. The Network pane appears.
352
4 In the TCP/IP menu on the left side, select SNMPv1 Access Control. The Access
Control pane appears.
5 Select Public. The Access Control Entry pane appears.
6 For a single-controller Storage Center, in the Access Control Entry pane, enter the
controller IP address in the Access Control Entry pane.
7 As an Access Type, select Read.
8 Click Apply.
9 Add the actual IP address of the clustered controller (not the management IP address).
Dell Compellent
353
10 Select Notification. The Notification pane appears.
11 In the Notification window, select trap receivers. The Trap Receivers pane appears.
354
12 Click Add Trap Receiver. The Trap Receiver pane appears.
13 Enable trap generation for this trap receiver.

14 In the NMS IP/Host name field, enter the following:
For a single-controller Storage Center, enter the controller IP address.
For a dual-controller Storage Center system, enter the IP address of the

Management controller. The default, 0.0.0.0, leaves the trap receiver undefined.
15 In the SNMPv1 field, enter Public (the default).

16 When Authenticate Traps is enabled, Storage Center receives authentication traps
(traps generated by invalid attempts to log on to this device). To disable that ability,
unmark the check box.
17 Click Apply.
Dell Compellent
355
Modify or Delete a Trap Receiver

To modify or delete a trap receiver, click its IP address or host name to access its settings.
If you delete a trap receiver, all notification settings configured under Event Actions for the
deleted trap receiver are set to their default values.
Configuring a Liebert UPS

1 In a new browser window, enter the IP address, assigned or derived from DHCP. The
Monitor pane appears.
2 Click the Configure tab. The Configuration Categories window appears.
3 From the tree on the left side, select Management ProtocolSNMPAccess.

4 The system may ask for a user name and password. Enter your user name and
password. The Access pane appears.
356
5 Click Edit.
6 In the Network Name column, enter the following:
For a single-controller Storage Center system, enter the controller IP address on the
first unused line.
For a dual-controller Storage Center system, enter the IP address of each controller
on the first two unused lines. Do not enter the Management IP of the Storage Center
but the true ETH0 IP of each Controller.
7 Select Read access.

8 For Community name enter Public.
9 Click Save.
10 From the tree on the left side, select Management ProtocolSNMPTraps. The
Traps pane appears.
Dell Compellent
357
11 Click Edit.
12 In the Network Name column, enter the following:
For a single-controller Storage Center system, enter the controller IP address on the
first unused line.
For a dual-controller Storage Center system, enter Management IP address (not the
ETH0 address).
13 In the Community column, enter Public.

14 Select or clear Heartbeat.
15 Click Save.
358
Reinitialize the UPS

1 In the menu tree on the left side, click Reinitialize.The Reinitialize pane appears.
2 To save changes, click Reinitialize. The UPS is added to the Storage Center
configuration.
Dell Compellent
359
360
Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin

This appendix describes the Dell Compellent VAAI (vStorage API for Array Integration)
Plugin and how to install it on VMware ESX/ESXi 4.1.
Note: For ESXi 5.0 and later, VAAI support is included in ESXi and the
Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin is not required.
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Dell Compellent
361
Appendix D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin
Introduction
VAAI is an API for storage partners that allows ESX/ESXi hosts to offload operations that
involve file locking, initializing file systems, and copying or moving data directly to back-end
storage. By offloading these tasks, VAAI both conserves storage fabric bandwidth and
reduces resources used on ESX/ESXi hosts. In general, VAAI improves data transfer
performance and is transparent to the user.
For ESX/ESXi 4.1, the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin must be installed on each ESX/ESXi
host in a datacenter to offload storage operations to a Dell Compellent Storage Center.
The offloaded storage operations are:
Block zeroing: Enables Dell Compellent Storage Centers to zero out a large number of
blocks to speed up provisioning of virtual machines on ESX/ESXi hosts.
Full copy: Enables Dell Compellent Storage Centers to make full copies of data within
the array without having the ESX/ESXi host read and write the data.
Hardware-assisted locking: Provides an alternative means to protect the metadata for

VMFS cluster-file systems, thereby improving the scalability of multiple ESX/ESXi hosts
sharing a Dell Compellent Storage Center datastore.
Listed by Storage Center version, the following table displays offload operations supported
by Dell Compellent.
Storage Center Version
Supported Offload Operations
4.5 5.5.1
None
5.5.2 and later
Block zeroing
6.0 and later
Block zeroing
Full copy
Hardware-assisted locking
Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1

Follow these steps to install the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin.
1 List the hardware acceleration claim rules on the ESX/ESXi host by executing the
following commands:
esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=Filter
esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=VAAI
If claim rules exist that have COMPELNT listed as the vendor in the Matches column,
remove these claim rules by referring to Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin
on ESX/ESXi 4.1 on page 364.
2 Use vMotion to move all of the virtual machines off the ESX/ESXi host or shut down all
of the virtual machines and put the host into maintenance mode.
3 Use the SCP (Secure Copy) utility to copy the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin file
(vmware-esx-dell-vaaip_compellent.vib) to the ESX/ESXi host.
Note: For information on using the SCP utility to copy files to and from an
ESX/ESXi host, see KB Article: 1918 on the VMware Knowledge Base
(http://kb.vmware.com/).
4 Install the plugin on the ESX/ESXi host by executing the following command:
esxupdate -b vmware-esx-dell_vaaip_compellent.vib update
362
Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1
5 Reboot the ESX/ESXi host.

6 Define hardware acceleration claim rules for the plugin by executing the following
commands:
esxcli corestorage claimrule add --claimrule-class=Filter
--plugin=VAAI_FILTER --type=vendor --vendor=COMPELNT --autoassign
esxcli corestorage claimrule add --claimrule-class=VAAI --plugin=
DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT --type=vendor --vendor=COMPELNT --autoassign
esxcli corestorage claimrule load --claimrule-class=Filter
esxcli corestorage claimrule load --claimrule-class=VAAI
esxcli corestorage claimrule run --claimrule-class=Filter
7 Verify that the new claim rules, which have COMPELNT listed as the vendor, were
successfully added by executing the following commands:
Example of command output:

Rule Class
Filter
Filter
Rule Class
Type
Plugin
5001 runtime vendor VAAI_FILTER
5001 file
vendor VAAI_FILTER
Matches
vendor=COMPELNT model=*
Rule Class Rule Class

Type
Plugin
Matches
VAAI
5001 runtime vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=*
VAAI
5001 file vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=*
8 To verify that the installation of the plugin was successful, execute the following
command and verify that DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT is listed in the VAAI Plugin
Name field for one or more devices:
esxcli vaai device list

naa.6000d3100001db000000000000000094
Device Display Name: Volume1
VAAI Plugin Name: DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT
9 To verify the hardware acceleration status of storage devices, execute the following
command:
esxcli corestorage device list
The VAAI Status field, in the command output, displays the hardware acceleration
status of a storage device. The hardware acceleration statuses for the Dell Compellent
VAAI Plugin are:
Dell Compellent
Unknown: Hardware acceleration is enabled for the storage device and the
back-end storage is Storage Center 5. The Attached Filters field displays the name
of the VAAI filter attached to the storage device.
Supported: Hardware acceleration is enabled for the storage device and the
back-end storage is Storage Center 6.The Attached Filters field displays the name
of the VAAI filter attached to the storage device.
Unsupported: Hardware acceleration is not enabled for the storage device.
363

naa.6000d3100001db0000000000094
Display Name: Volume1
Size: 20480
Device Type: Direct-Access
Multipath Plugin: NMP
Devfs Path: /vmfs/devices/disks/naa.6000d3100001db000000000000000094
Vendor: COMPELNT
Model: Compellent Vol
Revision: 0505
SCSI Level: 5
Is Pseudo: false
Status: on
Is RDM Capable: true
Is Local: false
Is Removable: false
Attached Filters: VAAI_FILTER
VAAI Status: unknown
Other UIDs: vml.02001200006000d3100001db00000000000000013b436f6d706
Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1

Follow these steps to uninstall the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin.
1 Use vMotion to move all of the virtual machines off the ESX/ESXi host or shut down all
of the virtual machines and put the host into maintenance mode.
2 Find the bulletin ID of the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin by executing the following
command from the vSphere CLI and looking for the text cross_dell-vaaip-compellent:
esxupdate --vib-view query

cross_dell-vaaip-compellent_410.1-300727
installed
2011-10-25T14:36:17.590977+00:00
In the example above, the bulletin ID of the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin is
cross_dell-vaaip-compellent_410.1-300727.
3 Remove the plugin by executing the following command:
esxupdate remove -b bulletin-id --maintenancemode
Example of command, using the bulletin ID found in Step 2:

# esxupdate remove -b cross_dell-vaaip-compellent_410.1-300727
--maintenancemode
4 Display the hardware acceleration claim rules on the ESX/ESXi host by executing the
following commands:

Rule Class
Filter
Filter
Rule Class
Type
Plugin
5001 runtime vendor VAAI_FILTER
5001 file
vendor VAAI_FILTER
Matches
Rule Class Rule Class

Type
Plugin
Matches
VAAI
5001 runtime vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=*
VAAI
5001 file vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=*
364
Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1
5 Remove the claim rules that have COMPELNT listed as the vendor in the Matches
column by executing the following commands:
esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r claimrule_ID
--claimrule-class=Filter
esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r claimrule_ID
--claimrule-class=VAAI
where, claimrule_ID is the number in the Rule column of the command output shown in
Step 4.
Example of commands:
# esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r 5001 --claimrule-class=Filter
# esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r 5001 --claimrule-class=VAAI
6 Reboot the ESX/ESXi host to complete the uninstallation.
Dell Compellent
365
366
Port Usage
This appendix describes port usage for communicating through the network to Dell
Compellent products in Storage Center.
Dell Compellent
Port
Protocol Name Type Usage
Purpose
22
Secure Console
(SSH*)
TCP
Outbound
SSH secure communication

between Storage Center and
Support Center Secure SSH
Servers
25
SMTP
TCP
Outbound
Sending email notifications
69
TFTP
UDP
Inbound
Configuration and boot files
88
Kerberos
TCP
Outbound
Secure communication
80/8080
HTTP
TCP
Inbound/Outbound
Automatic redirect to secure ports
123
NTP
UDP
Inbound/Outbound
Network time protocol
161
SNMP
UDP
Inbound
Communication from network

manager
162
SNMP Trap
UDP
Inbound/Outbound
Sending alerts
389
LDAP
TCP
Outbound
Directory access
443/8443
HTTPS
TCP
Inbound/Outbound
Communicating with Storage

Center applications
Phone Home*
514
Syslog
UDP
Outbound
Forwarding Storage Center logs to

syslog servers
636
LDAPS
TCP
Outbound
Using LDAP over SSL
3033
HTTPS
TCP
Inbound/Outbound
Compellent API
3205
iSNS
TCP
Outbound
Communication with network

servers
3260/
Dynamic
iSCSI Cards
TCP
Inbound/Outbound
iSCSI Initiator (server or replication

source)
5000-5010
Compellent IPC
UDP
Inbound/Outbound
IPC traffic for communicating with

Storage Center components
For SSH and Phone Home, set up a firewall to allow outbound communication from both controller ETH 0 IP addresses
and also from the shared management IP address.
367
Appendix E Port Usage
368
Glossary
A
Assigned Disks
Same as Managed Disks. Physical disks that are identified by Storage Center and to which data can be
written. Assigned disks use metadata to track information about volumes on the disk and other assigned
disks managed by the controller.
Asynchronous Replication
After data has been written to the primary storage site, new writes to that site can be accepted without
having to wait for the secondary (remote) storage site to also finish its writes. Asynchronous Replication
does not have the latency impact that synchronous Replication does, but if the primary site failed before the
data was written to the secondary site the data that had not yet been written could be lost. See also
Replication.
B
Back End
The component in the Storage Center SAN flow of data writes (server to switch to controller to disks) that
receive data writes. In general, disk drives in enclosures are the back end of the controller. See also Target
System.
Backup
A two step process. A Replay is first copied to a non-volatile disk remote system. In the event of problems
(such as disk drive failures, power outages, or virus infection) resulting in data loss or damage to the original
data, the Replay is retrieved and restored to a View Volume.
Bandwidth
The amount of data that can be sent to or from Storage Center.
C
CHA
See Compellent Host Adapter.
Dell Compellent
369
Glossary
CHAP
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is an option for authentication of iSCSI
communications. CHAP periodically verifies the identity of a peer using a 3-way handshake, initially when
the link is established. After the Link Establishment phase is complete, the authenticator sends a challenge
message to the peer. The peer responds with a value calculated using a one-way hash function. The
authenticator checks the response against its own calculation of the expected hash value. If the values
match, the authentication is acknowledged; if values do not match, the connection is terminated.
Cache
A high speed memory or storage device used to reduce the effective time required to read data from or write
data to a lower speed memory or device. Storage Center provides configurable cache to minimize disk
latencies.
Cluster Node
Server that is a member of a server cluster.
Clustered Controllers
More than one Storage Center controller that is interconnected (typically at high-speeds) for the purpose of
improving reliability, availability, serviceability and performance (using load balancing). Storage Center
provides automatic controller failover in an active-active configuration. Fully mirrored, battery backup cache
provides automatic restart and volumes migrate between controllers in the event of controller failure.
Compellent Host Adapter (CHA)
Internal cache card/battery seated in each Storage Center controller. Write cache memory is mirrored to the
cache card. On a cluster-controller Storage Center, the controller 1 cache card holds the mirror for controller
2, and the controller 2 cache card holds the mirror for controller 1. On a single-controller Storage Center,
the cache card holds the mirror for the single controller.
Conservation Mode
Mode reached when remaining free space reaches 32 GB (or less for configurations smaller than 3.2 TB).
When Storage Center enters conservation mode, System Manager generates a Conservation Mode Alert
to inform you that no new volumes can be created and that it will begin to aggressively expire Replays.
Control Port
In virtual port mode, a Control Port is created for each iSCSI fault domain. iSCSI Servers connect to the
Storage Center using the Control Port. The Control Port redirects a connection to the appropriate virtual
port.
Controller
Provides disk aggregation (RAID), I/O routing, error detection, and data recovery. Provides the intelligence
for the entire Storage Center subsystem. Every Storage Center contains at least one.
Copy-Mirror-Migrate
Storage Center feature allowing volumes to be migrated between different disk types and RAID levels.
370
D
DNS (Domain Name Service)
Name of the TCP/IP stack that converts domain names into IP addresses.
Data Instant Replay
Ensures high system and application availability. Enables backup and recovery of volumes without
impacting resources. Captures a point in time copy, based on the Replay Profile. This provides the ability to
roll back a volume to a previous point in time. Only data that has changed from the previous point in time
copy is stored.
Data Progression
Automatically migrates data to the right class of storage based on assigned or recommended policies.
Allows businesses to optimize utilization of storage resources through migration to the appropriate class of
storage devices, to higher or to lower performance devices, based on data access requirements.
Deduplication
Deduplication copies only the changed portions of a Replay, rather than all data captured in each Replay.
Disaster Recovery
The ability to recover from the loss of a complete site, whether due to natural disaster or malicious intent.
Storage Center disaster recovery includesData Instant replay and Remote Instant Replay.
Disk Folders
A collection of physical disks that can be assigned attributes by the user. Performance is improved by
maximizing the number of disk drives in a folder. Volumes draw storage from disk folders. Folders may be
associated with multiple pagepools.
Disk Position
The position of the disk in the enclosure. An example of a disk position is 01-01. The first number is the row
number, from the top of the enclosure. The second number is column number from the left of the enclosure.
For example, Disk 01-02 is in the first (top row) and second column from the left.
Dual Redundancy
See Redundancy.
Dynamic Capacity
Mandatory application program that enables an administrator to allocate space only when data is physically
written to the volume. Dynamic capacity reduces storage expenditures by consuming physical disk space
only when data is written to a volume.
Dynamic Controllers
A minimum of two Storage Center clustered controllers that provide automatic failover by using an internal
heartbeat.
Dell Compellent
371
Glossary
E
Emergency Mode
Mode reached when the Storage Cener can no longer operate because there is no more free space.
Enclosure
The box that holds the disks. Provides disk status, temperature sensors, cooling fans, an alarm system, and
a single interface to the controller.
Ethernet
A protocol that defines a common set of rules and signals for networks.
Eth0
Ethernet port 0. Storage Center uses Eth0 to support log on, access the GUI, Replication, and to send email,
alerts, SNMP traps, and Phone Home data.
Eth1
Storage Center uses Eth1 for dedicated InterProcess Communication between controllers in a multicontroller configuration.
F
Fabric
A combination of interconnected switches that act as a unified routing infrastructure. It allows multiple
connections among devices on a SAN and lets new devices enter unobtrusively. A FC (or iSCSI) topology
with at least one switch present on the network.
FastTrack
An optional Storage Center utility that dynamically places the most active data on the outer (faster) disk
tracks.
Fault Domain
A fault domain identifies a failover set. In virtual port mode, all front-end ports can be part of the one fault
domain. In Legacy Mode, each primary and reserved port creates one fault domain.
Fibre Channel
A high-speed interconnect used to connect servers to Storage Center controllers and back-end disk
enclosures. FC components include HBAs, hubs, switches, and cabling. The term FC also refers to a highspeed, fully duplexed serial communication protocol permitting data transfer rates of up to 10 Gigabit per
second.
FluidFS
The Dell Fluid File System (FluidFS) is a scalable NAS with up to eight controllers in a cluster.
Front End
The component in the Storage Center SAN flow of data writes (server to switch to controller to disks) that
initiates data writes. In general, servers (or switches) are the front end of the controller. However, a Storage
Center that is replicating data to a remote system is the front end of the remote system. See also Back End.
372
G
GUI
Graphical User Interface.
H
High Availability
A continuously available system is characterized as having essentially no downtime in any given year. A
system with 99.999% availability experiences only about five minutes of downtime. In contrast, a high
availability system is defined as having 99.9% uptime, which translates into a few hours of planned or
unplanned downtime each year.
HBA (Host Bus Adapter)
The HBA is the intelligent hardware residing on the host server that controls the transfer of data between
the host and the Storage Center.
HTTP
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol.
Hot Spare
A Hot Spare disk is a backup disk. In the event that an active array fails, the controller makes the Hot Spare
part of the active array and rebuilds data on the fly. Although the Hot Spare becomes an active disk without
human intervention, remember to replace the failed drive as soon as possible, so that the array is again
protected with a new Hot Spare. Hot spares can span multiple disk enclosures. A Storage Center Hot Spares
can have a different capacity than the data drive it replaces.
I
Initiator
A source Storage Center that initiates Replication. Data is copied from an initiator to a Target System.
IO
Input/output. The process of moving data between a computer system's main memory and an external
device or interface such as a storage device, display, printer, or network connected to other computer
systems. IO is a collective term for reading, or moving data into a computer system's memory, and writing,
or moving data from a computer system's memory to another location.
iSCSI
iSCSI (Internet SCSI) is the specification that defines the encapsulation of SCSI packets over ethernet using
the TCP/IP transport protocol, or a protocol that enables transport of block data over IP networks, without
the need for a specialized network infrastructure, such as FC.
Dell Compellent
373
Glossary
L
Lead Controller
In a dual-controller configuration, the leader controller is the primary controller. Under ordinary
circumstances, the controllers share read/write duties, thus doubling IOs. In the event the peer controller
fails, the lead controller assumes the duties of both controllers. See also Peer Controller.
Legacy Mode
Non-virtual port mode. in Legacy Mode, fault domains associate Primary and Reserved front-end ports to
each other as opposed to Virtual Mode where all front-end ports can be part of the same fault domain.
Load Balancing
Referring to the ability to redistribute load (read/write requests) to an alternate path between server and
storage device, load balancing maintain high performance IO.
LUN
A logical unit is a conceptual division (a subunit) of a storage disk or a set of disks. Each logical unit has an
address, known as the logical unit number (LUN), which allows it to be uniquely identified.
M
MAC Address
In computer networking a Media Access Control address (MAC address) is a quasi-unique identifier
attached to most network adapters (NICs). It is a number that acts like a name for a particular network
adapter, so, for example, the network cards (or built-in network adapters) in two different computers will
have different names, or MAC addresses. It is possible to change the MAC address.
Address used to connect to Storage Center. Each controller has its own IP address, but the management
IP address remains constant.
Managed Disks
Disks that are grouped together to form a discrete bundle, across which data is striped and from which
volumes are created.
Manual Replay
Storage Center feature that allows the user to manually create point-in-time copies of volumes.
Mapping (Volume to Server)
Mapping defines which servers can access specific volumes. After this linkage is established, the volume
will appear to the server as a single, local disk drive of the specified size.
Mentoring Controller
During installation or after replacing or adding a controller, the mentoring controller copies configuration
information to the new or added controller. Either the lead or peer controller can become a mentoring
controller.
374
Multipathing
Redundant storage components that transfer data between server and storage. These components include
cabling, adapters, switches, and the software that enables multipathing.
N
NPIV Mode
N_Port ID Virtualization is a prerequisite for enabling FC virtual ports. If a switch does not accept NPIV, FC
ports cannot be converted to Virtual Ports and NPIV is turned off.
NTP
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems over
packet-switched, variable-latency data networks.
P
Pagepool
A pool of storage.
Pagepool Alert
The first alert generated when the pagepool space consumed by volumes and Replays exceeds the
configurable pagepool alert threshold, and there is no more free disk space available for the pagepool to
consume.
Peer Controller
The peer controller is the equal of the Lead controller. In a dual-controller configuration, both controllers
share read/write duties, thus doubling IO. In the event the lead controller fails, the peer controller assumes
the duties of both controllers.
Port
The physical connection point on servers, switches, Storage Center controller, and disk drive enclosures
that is used to connect to other devices. Ports on a FC network are identified by their Worldwide Port Name
(WWPN); on iSCSI networks, ports are given an iSCSI name.
Preallocation
Pre-allocating storage physically assigns storage to the volume before its use by the server. Not allowed for
volumes already having Replays.
Q
QoS Definition
Quality of Service. A networking term that specifies a guaranteed throughput level to guarantee end-to end
latency will not exceed a specified level.
Dell Compellent
375
Glossary
R
RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks)
A way of encoding data over multiple physical disks to ensure that if a hard disk fails a redundant copy of
the data can be accessed instead. Example schemes include mirroring and RAID-5.
RAID 0
Stripes data but provides no redundancy. If one disk fails, all data is lost. Do not use RAID 0 unless data is
backed up elsewhere.
RAID 5-5 and 5-9
Maintains a logical copy of the data using a mathematically derived rotating parity stripe across 5 or 9 disks.
The parity stripe is derived from the data stripes. This method has less overhead for the redundant
information than RAID 10; however write performance is slower than RAID 10 due to the calculation of the
parity stripe for every write.RAID 5 protects against data loss when any single disk fails. RAID 5-5 is 80%
efficient. RAID 5-9 is 89% efficient.
RAID 6-6 and 6-10
RAID 6 protects against data loss when any 2 disks fail. RAID 6-6 is 67% efficient. RAID 6-10 is 80%
efficient.
RAID 10
Striped and mirrored. Provides both data availability and top performance. Maintains a minimum of one full
copy of all data on the volume. RAID 10 provides optimum Read / Write performance, increased probability
of withstanding multiple failures, and the fastest restoration of data.
RAID 10-DM
RAID 10 Dual Mirror provides maximum protection for storage. Data is written simultaneously to three
separate disks. All three disks return a write acknowledgement. RAID 10 protects against data loss when
any 2 disks fail.
Redundancy
The duplication of information or hardware equipment components to ensure that if a primary resource fails,
a secondary resource can take over its function. Storage Center provides redundancy for each component
so that there is no single point of failure. Single Redundancy protects against loss of data if any one disk
fails. Dual Redundancy protects against data lost if any two disks fail.
Remote System
A Storage Center that sends or receives Replication data.
Remote Instant Replay
Remote Instant Replay is a Replay written to a remote backup site. The sites can be active-active, with bidirectional remote copies that can either have matched or split intervals. Also knows as Replication.
Remote System
A Storage Center that is receiving Replication data.
376
Replay
A fully usable copy of a defined collection of data that contains an image of the data as it appeared at the
point in time at which the copy was initiated.
Replay Profile
Set of rules for taking Replays that is applied to all volumes using that profile.
Replication
Replication is the process of duplicating data from one highly available site to another. The Replication
process can be synchronous or asynchronous; duplicates are known as Replays.
S
SAN (Storage Area Network)
A storage area network (SAN) is a specialized network that provides access to high performance and highly
available storage subsystems using block storage protocols. The SAN is made up of specific devices, such
as host bus adapters (HBAs) in the host servers, switches that help route storage traffic, and disk storage
subsystems. The main characteristic of a SAN is that the storage subsystems are generally available to
multiple hosts at the same time, which makes them scalable and flexible. Compare with NAS.
SBOD
Switched Bunch of Disks.
SCSI
SCSI (Small Computer Systems Interface) is a collection of ANSI standards that define IO buses primarily
intended for connecting storage devices to servers.
Server
Servers define connectivity to the Storage Center. They allow you to associate your server name to the
hardware connectivity presented by the server for easy identification.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) defines a message format and forwarding procedure to enable
messages to be sent between hosts on the Internet.
Snapshot
See Replay.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internet-standard Layer-7 (application layer) protocol
for collecting information from and configuring network devices such as servers, hubs, switches, and routers
on an Internet Protocol (IP) network. SNMP can be used to collect information about network statistics from
these devices and to relay this information to a central management console to monitor network health, trap
errors, perform diagnostics, and generate reports.
Storage Center
A complete storage solution that provides unified physical storage and storage management. Storage
Center Architecture integrates multiple disk technologies with multiple interfaces and controllers.
Dell Compellent
377
Glossary
Storage Clustering
Storage Center software providing automatic controller failover through multiple controllers in an activeactive configuration. Fully mirrored, battery backup cache provides automatic restart in the event of a
controller failure.
Storage Pool
An undifferentiated pool of available disk space from which Storage Center creates volumes.
Storage Profile
A collection of rules that identify RAID level and drive types (tiers) on which data is stored. All volumes are
attached to a Storage Profile. Storage Profiles can be applied by default, to each volume, to a group or all
volumes. If RAID levels or tiers in a Storage Profile change, data in volumes attached to that Storage Profile
is moved by Data Progression to the new RAID levels or tiers.
Storage Type
Pool of storage from which volumes are created. Storage Center is most efficient when all disks are
combined into one pool of storage. Data Progression can then store data with maximum efficiency. In some
circumstances, you can create additional based on redundancy and data page size.
Synchronous Replication
In synchronous Replication, each write to the primary disk and the secondary (remote) disk must be
complete before the next write can begin. The advantage of this approach is that the two sets of data are
always synchronized. The disadvantage is that if the distance between the two storage disks is substantial,
the Replication process can take a long time and slows down the writing of data. See also asynchronous
Replication.
T
Target System
The Storage Center that receives Replication data from an initiating Storage Center. See Initiator.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
Thin Provisioning
Volume sizes can be defined that are greater than the actual physical storage. Storage space is only used
when data is written. Thin Provisioning allows organizations to reduce their overall disk expenditures,
increase availability and achieve greater performance.
Tiers
Blocks of data that are stored according to its intended use. For example, data that has been accessed
within the last four progression cycles is stored on the highest tier, composed of the fastest disks. Data that
has not been accessed for the last 12 progression cycles is gradually migrated down to the lowest tier,
composed of slower, cheaper, larger disks.
Transport Type
The protocol used to communicate data between the Storage Center and attached servers.
378
U
Unassigned Disk
Disk drives that have not been assigned to a managed disk folder and therefore cannot be used by the
Storage Center. Sometimes referred to as an unassigned disk.
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply. A power supply that includes a battery that will keep Storage Center running
in the event of a power outage. Power from the battery will last long enough to save data in RAM and shut
Storage Center down gracefully.
V
View Volume
A volume that has been recreated from a previous Replay.
Virtual Port
Virtual ports eliminate the need for reserve ports. When operating in Virtual Port Mode, all front-end ports
accept IO and can be part of one fault domain.
Virtualization
The amalgamation of multiple network storage devices into what appears to be a single storage unit.
Virtualization makes tasks such as archiving, back-up, and recovery easier and faster. Virtualization is
implemented through the Storage Center controller software.
Volume
A volume is a discrete area of storage striped to multiple hard disks.
Volume Type
Volume Type can be Dynamic, Replay Enabled, or Replication. A volume is dynamic until at least one
Replay has been taken of that volume. After a Replay has been taken of a volume, it becomes Replay
Enabled. A Replication volume is one that is being Replicated to another Storage Center.
W
WWN
World Wide Name.
Dell Compellent
379
Glossary
380
680-019-013 A

Dell Compellent Storage Center Configuration Guide

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Dell Compellent Storage Center Configuration Guide

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Storage Center

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrators Guide

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

Copyright Notice and Trademarks

Contacting Dell Technical Support Services

Remove Mappings from a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrators Guide

Creating Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrators Guide

Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Legacy Port Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrators Guide

Apply a Storage Profile to a Single Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Add iSCSI Remote Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrators Guide

System Properties Message Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

9 Users and User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

A Server HBA Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

B iSCSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

C UPS User FAQ and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

E Port Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrators Guide

Provision volumes and map them to servers.

Display the status of hardware components.

Manage local backup and restore.

Phone Home information to Dell Technical Support Services.

Set up users and access privileges.

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Requirements for System Manager

Windows Internet Explorer versions 7, 8, and 9

Windows Internet Explorer Desktop version 10 (Internet Explorer

Mozilla Firefox on Microsoft Windows

Java version 6 or later

Starting Storage Center System Manager

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrators Guide

Starting Storage Center System Manager

3 In the User field, enter the default administrator user name:

Respond to Startup Messages

Unbalanced Local Ports

Turn off the rebalance ports message:

IO Card Change Detected

Chapter 1 Getting Started

View the System Dashboard

Date and time when the summary was generated.

Current status of storage utilization. When the Free disk space

Total disk space

Amount of raw disk space available (gold in the bar graph).

Used disk space

Space used by volumes and replays (blue in the bar graph).

Free disk space

The Blue banner shows when the history was generated.

The Blue line shows the amount of space used recently.

The Yellow line shows the Low Space Threshold.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrators Guide

Navigating the Interface

Navigating the Interface

Storage Management Menu

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrators Guide

Navigating the Interface

Context menu commands

Chapter 1 Getting Started